Upload
vuongquynh
View
250
Download
0
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
TECHNICAL MANUAL UPDATEJuly, 2001
Dear Dealer,
This DCS 50si Technical Manual Update includes information on the new FALCONkeyset family.
Please add or replace the following material:
1. General Description Section- Replace the existing section by printing the 50_gd.pdf file contained in the CD.
2. User Instructions Section- New Table of Contents and modified pages 1.1—1.22.- New Falcon Keyset User Guide.- Please keep your existing DCS 50si Keyset User Guide, DCS 50si Standard TelephoneUser Guide, DCS 50si System Administration and Special Features Guide and DCS 50siAuto Attendant and Uniform Call Distribution Administration Guide.
3. Installation Section- New Table of Contents.- Modified Part 6. Connecting Station Equipment.- Remove Figures 6-15, 6-16, 6-17 and 6-18. Replace with the following figures: 6-15A, 6-15B, 6-16, 6-17, 6-18, and 6-19.
4. Programming Section- Modified MMCs: 104, 106, 116, 209, 213, 315, 404, 405, 602, 706, 714, 715, 722,723, 725, 728.- Modified Datasheets: 107 and 722&723.
Thank you.
T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S
USER INSTRUCTIONS SECTION
PART DESCRIPTION PAGE
1 ENHANCED DISPLAY PROGRAMMING
1.1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................... 1.1
1.2 LOCKING YOUR KEYSET................................................................... 1.2
1.3 CHANGING YOUR PASSCODE ......................................................... 1.3
1.4 CALL FORWARDING .......................................................................... 1.4
1.5 SETTING YOUR ANSWER MODE ..................................................... 1.5
1.6 PROGRAMMING YOUR STATION’S NAME ....................................... 1.6
1.7 PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED DIAL LOCATIONS ................ 1.7
1.8 NAMING YOUR PERSONAL SPEED DIAL LOCATIONS .................. 1.8
1.9 ADDING EXTENDERS TO KEYS ....................................................... 1.9
1.10 CHECKING STATION STATUS ........................................................ 1.10
1.11 CHANGING YOUR TIME AND DATE DISPLAY ............................... 1.11
1.12 SETTING STATION ON/OFF OPTIONS .......................................... 1.12
1.13 SELECTING A RING TONE .............................................................. 1.14
1.14 ALARM REMINDER ........................................................................... 1.15
1.15 SETTING A PROGRAMMED MESSAGE .......................................... 1.16
1.16 ALARM REMINDER WITH MESSAGE ............................................. 1.17
1.17 CALLER ID DISPLAY ......................................................................... 1.18
1.18 BACKGROUND MUSIC VOLUME .................................................... 1.19
2 FALCON KEYSET USER GUIDE
3 DCS KEYSET USER GUIDE
4 STANDARD TELEPHONE USER GUIDE
5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION AND SPECIAL FEATURES GUIDE
6 AUTO ATTENDANT AND UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTIONADMINISTRATION GUIDE
DCS 50si USER INSTRUCTIONSTECHNICAL MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS JUNE 2001
DCS 50si USER INSTRUCTIONSTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 JUNE 2001
1.1
PART 1. ENHANCED DISPLAY PROGRAMMING
1.1 OVERVIEW
• FALCON KEYSETSThis section provides more detailed programming procedures that can be used byexperienced display keyset users. These procedures will help explain some of thedisplays observed as the simpler procedures detailed in the Keyset User Guide arefollowed.
The diagram below illustrates the keys on a FALCON 28 BUTTON and a FALCON 18BUTTON keyset that have special functions during programming. When required,these keys will be referred to by the names described below.
DCS 50si USER INSTRUCTIONSTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 JUNE 2001
1.2
The diagram below illustrates the keys on a FALCON 8 BUTTON keyset that havespecial functions during programming. When required, these keys will be referred to bythe names described below.
DCS 50si USER INSTRUCTIONSTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 JUNE 2001
1.3
• DCS KEYSETSThis section provides more detailed programming procedures that can be used byexperienced display keyset users. These procedures will help explain some of thedisplays observed as the simpler procedures detailed in the Keyset User Guide arefollowed.
The diagram below illustrates the keys on a DCS display keyset that have specialfunctions during programming. When required, these keys will be referred to by thenames described below.
DCS 50si USER INSTRUCTIONSTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 JUNE 2001
1.4
1.2 LOCKING YOUR KEYSET
You can lock your keyset to prevent other people from making or receiving calls whileyou are away. You can unlock it when you return.
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 100Display shows
[201] STN LOCKPASSCODE:_
2. Enter your passocdeDefault is 1234
[201] STN LOCKUNLOCKED
3. Enter 1 for locking outgoing calls (Internalcalls will still be allowed).
[201] STN LOCKLOCKED OUTGOING
OR4. Enter 2 for locking all calls (Internal and
external calls will not be allowed).[201] STN LOCKLOCKED ALL CALLS
5. Enter 0 to unlock your phone. [201] STN LOCKUNLOCKED
6. Press the transfer key to save and exit
DCS 50si USER INSTRUCTIONSTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 JUNE 2001
1.5
1.3 CHANGING YOUR PASSCODE
Each keyset user can set or change his/her individual passcode. This passcode is usedto lock or unlock keysets, for toll restriction override and to access the DISA feature.
NOTE: Default passcodes cannot be used for toll restriction override or for DISAaccess.
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 101Display shows
[201] PASSCODEOLD CODE:_
2. Enter the existing passcode (default = 1234) [201] PASSCODEOLD CODE:****
3. Enter the new passcode [201] PASSCODENEW CODE:_
4. Reenter the new passcode to verify the numberIf reentered correctly, display shows
[201] PASSCODEVERIFY :SUCCESS
5. Press the transfer key to save and exit
DCS 50si USER INSTRUCTIONSTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 JUNE 2001
1.6
1.4 CALL FORWARDING
The DCS 50si allows six types of call forwarding—Forward All, Forward No Answer,Forward Busy, Forward Follow Me, Forward DND and Forward External. There is anadditional option, Forward Busy/No Answer, that allows both of these options to beactivated at the same time, provided destinations have been entered for both.
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 102Display shows
[201] FORWARD0:FORWARD CANCEL
2. Dial 0–6 to select the forward type (e.g., 1)OR
[201] FORWARD1:ALL CALL:NONE
Press UP or DOWN to select the forward typePress the right soft key to move the cursor
3. Dial the destination number (e.g., 202)OR
[201] FORWARD1:ALL CALL:202
Press UP or DOWN to select the destinationPress the right soft key to move the cursor
4. Dial 1 to setOR
[201] FORWARDCURENTLY SET:YES
Press UP or DOWN to select YES or NO
5. Press the transfer key to store and exit
DCS 50si USER INSTRUCTIONSTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 JUNE 2001
1.7
1.5 SETTING YOUR ANSWER MODE
Each keyset and add-on module (AOM) can have its answer mode for intercom callsset to one of the following options:
RING—The station will ring in one of eight custom ring patterns. Calls are answered bypressing the ANS/RLS key or lifting the handset.
AUTO—After giving a short attention tone, the station will automatically answer calls onthe speakerphone. When a C.O. line is transferred to a station in Auto Answer, thescreened portion of the call will be Auto Answer, but the keyset or AOM will ring whenthe transfer is complete if the user has not pressed the ANS/RLS key or lifted thehandset.
VOICE—The station will not ring. After a short attention tone, callers can make anannoucement. The called party must press the ANS/RLS key or lift the handset toreply.
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 103Display shows
[201] ANS MODERING MODE
2. Dial 0, 1 or 2 to change the ring mode, e.g., 2OR
[201] ANS MODEVOICE ANNOUNCE
Press UP or DOWN to select the ring mode
3. Press the transfer key to store and exit
DCS 50si USER INSTRUCTIONSTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 JUNE 2001
1.8
1.6 PROGRAMMING YOUR STATION’S NAME
Names are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character. Pressing thedial pad key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory name is“SAM SMITH,” press the number “7” three times to get the letter “S.” Press the number“2” once to get the letter “A.” Continue selecting characters from the table below tocomplete your message. Pressing the bottom left programmable key will change theletter from upper case to lower case. There are up to 11 characters that can be used.
NOTE: When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previouscharacter, press the VOL UP or DOWN keys to move the cursor to the right or to theleft.
• DCS KEYSETS
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5
DIAL 0 Q Z . ) 0DIAL 1 space ? , ! 1DIAL 2 A B C @ 2DIAL 3 D E F # 3DIAL 4 G H I $ 4DIAL 5 J K L % 5DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6DIAL 7 P R S & 7DIAL 8 T U V ✱ 8DIAL 9 W X Y ( 9DIAL ✱ : = [ ] ✱
The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %,$, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.
DCS 50si USER INSTRUCTIONSTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 JUNE 2001
1.9
• FALCON KEYSETS
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5
DIAL 0 < > . ) 0DIAL 1 space ? , ! 1DIAL 2 A B C @ 2DIAL 3 D E F # 3DIAL 4 G H I $ 4DIAL 5 J K L % 5DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6DIAL 7 P Q R S 7DIAL 8 T U V ✱ 8DIAL 9 W X Y Z 9DIAL ✱ : = [ ] ✱
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previouscharacter, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 104Display shows
[201] STN NAME
2. Enter the station name using the proceduredescribed above
[201] STN NAMESAMSUNG
3. Press the transfer key to store and exit
DCS 50si USER INSTRUCTIONSTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 JUNE 2001
1.10
1.7 PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED DIALLOCATIONS
You can program frequently dialed telephone numbers in a personal speed dial list.Each station user begins with ten numbers 00–09 and may be assigned up to fiftynumbers. See your system administrator to determine the amount assigned to yourstation.
NOTE: Press button B for flash and button C for pause.
Display keyset users may want to hide some speed dial numbers so they will not showin the display. Before entering a telephone number, press button E. All digits after thiswill be hidden. Press button E again to begin displaying digits.
If your system uses rotary (or pulse) dialing C.O. lines, pressing button D beforeentering a speed dial will cause all subsequent digits to be sent as DTMF tones untilthe D button is pressed again.
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 105Display shows
[201] SPEED DIAL00:
If you have no speed dial bins,the display will be as shown
[201] SPEED DIALSPDBLK NOT EXIST
2. Dial the location number (e.g., 05)OR
[201] SPEED DIAL05:_
Press UP or DOWN to select the locationPress the right soft key to move cursor
3. Enter the trunk access code (e.g., 9) followedby the number to be dialed (e.g., 4264100)
[201] SPEED DIAL05:9-4264100_
ORPress the left soft key to return to step 2
4. Press the F button to access the next programOR
Press the transfer key to save and exit
DCS 50si USER INSTRUCTIONSTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 JUNE 2001
1.11
1.8 NAMING YOUR PERSONAL SPEED DIALLOCATIONS
This program allows a character name to be entered for each personal speed diallocation. This name enables the speed dial number to be located when using thedirectory dial feature. The directory dial feature allows the display keyset user to selecta speed dial location by scanning its name. There are up to 11 characters that can beused.
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 106Display shows
[201] SPEED NAME00:
2. Dial the speed dial location (e.g., 01)OR
[201] SPEED NAME01:_
Use UP or DOWN to scroll through the locationnumbers and use the right soft key to move thecursor
3. Enter the location name using the proceduredescribed in Programming Your Station’s Name
[201] SPEED NAME01:SAMSUNG_
4. Press UP or DOWN to move to the nextlocation
ORPress the F key to program speed dial numbers
5. Press the transfer key to store and exit
DCS 50si USER INSTRUCTIONSTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 JUNE 2001
1.12
1.9 ADDING EXTENDERS TO KEYS
This program allows you to assign key extenders to make a general access feature keymore specific. The feature keys that can have extenders are listed below:
FEATURE KEY DESCRIPTION EXTENDER
BOSS Boss and Secretary 1–4DP Direct Pickup Extension or station group numberDS Direct Station Select Any extension numberFWRD Call Forward 0–6GPIK Group Pickup 01–20IG In/Out of Group Any group number you are part of
(501–509)MMPG Meet Me Page 0–9, ✱PAGE Page 0–9, ✱SPD Speed Dial 00–49, 500–999PSMG Programmed Message 01–20DIR Directory PERS (1), SYS (2) or STN (3)VT Voice Mail Transfer Voice Mail Group (501–529)
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 107Display shows the first station
[201] EXT (KTS)01:CALL1
2. Enter the key number, e.g., 18OR
[201] EXT (KTS)18:DS
Use UP and DOWN to scroll through the keysUse the right soft key to move the cursor
ORPress the key to be programmed
3. Dial the extender according to above tablePress the right soft key to return to step 2
[201] EXT (KTS)18:DS DS207
ORPress the transfer key to store and exit
ORPress the speaker key to store and advance tothe next program
DCS 50si USER INSTRUCTIONSTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 JUNE 2001
1.13
1.10 CHECKING STATION STATUS
This program displays the following attributes of a station port. This is a read onlyfeature.
0 PORT # Port (1–80) / Slot (1–10) – Channel (1–16) / Offset (1–16)1 TENANT NUMBER 1–22 PICKUP GROUP None, 01–303 SGR Station Group Number4 BOSS-SECR None, 1–45 PAGE Page Zone (1–4)6 DAY COS NO COS (01–30)7 NIGHT COS NO COS (01–30)
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 108Display shows
[201] STN STATUSP01:S1-01 OFS:01
2. Press UP or DOWN to view the status items [201] STN STATUSTYPE:24B US SET
3. Press the transfer key to exit
DCS 50si USER INSTRUCTIONSTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 JUNE 2001
1.14
1.11 CHANGING YOUR TIME AND DATE DISPLAY
Display keysets will always have the date and time displayed when not in use. You canselect from the following display options:
0 COUNTRY Sets overall display format and has two options0 = ORIENTAL MM/DD DAY HH:MM1 = WESTERN DAY DD MM HH:MM
1 CLOCK Sets format of clock display and has two options0 = 12 HOUR (Displays 1 P.M. as 01:00)1 = 24 HOUR (Displays 1 P.M. as 13:00)
2 DISPLAY Sets format of DAY and MONTH display and has two options0 = UPPER CASE (Displays Friday as FRI and March as MAR)1 = LOWER CASE (Displays Friday as Fri and March as Mar)
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 109Display shows
[201] DAY FORMATCOUNTRY:WESTERN
2. Press UP or DOWN to select the display modePress the right soft key to move the cursor
[201] DAY FORMATCOUNTRY:ORIENTAL
3. Press the right soft key to return to step 2OR
Press the left soft key to return to step 3
4. Press the transfer key to store and exit
DCS 50si USER INSTRUCTIONSTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 JUNE 2001
1.15
1.12 SETTING STATION ON/OFF OPTIONS
The following options may be turned on and off at your keyset.
0. AME BGM This feature selects whether a station using Anwer MachineEmulation will hear their personal greeting or BGM whilecallers are listening to the personal greeting. A BGM sourcemust be selected for this to work. This feature applies only ifa CADENCE card is installed in the system.
1. AME PSWD If this option is set to YES, station users who have AME setmust enter their station password to listen to messagesbeing left.
2. AUTO HOLD Automatically places an existing C.O. call on hold if theCALL button, trunk key or trunk route key is pressed duringthat call. This will not affect the Auto Hold part of transferand park/page.
3. AUTO TIMER Automatically starts the stopwatch timer immediately when aC.O. call is answered or after a short delay on an outgoingcall.
4. HEADSET USE When on, this feature disables the hook switch, allowing aheadset user to answer all calls on the headset withoutrequiring to lift the handset.
5. HOT KEYPAD When on, this feature allows the user to dial directorynumbers without having to first lift the handset or press thespeaker button.
6. KEY TONE Allows the user to hear a slight tone when pressing buttonson the set.
7. PAGE REJOIN This feature allows keyset users to hear the remainingportion of an ongoing internal page or all page over thespeaker of their keysets after they return their keysets toidle. To enable this feature, follow the procedure below.
8. RING PREF. When off, this feature requires the user to press the fastflashing button to answer a ringing call after lifting thehandset.
DCS 50si USER INSTRUCTIONSTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 JUNE 2001
1.16
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 110Display shows
[201] STN ON/OFFAME BGM :OFF
2. Dial the option number from above list (e.g., 4)OR
[201] STN ON/OFFHOT KEYPAD :OFF
Press UP or DOWN to select the option andpress the right soft key to move the cursor
3. Press UP or DOWN to select ON or OFFPress the left or right soft key to return to step 2
[201] STN ON/OFFHOT KEYPAD :ON
ORDial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF
If option 0 from above list is dialed atStep 2
[201] STN ON/OFFAME BGM :OFF
If option 1 from above list is dialed atStep 2
[201] STN ON/OFFAME PSWD :OFF
If option 2 from above list is dialed atStep 2
[201] STN ON/OFFAUTO HOLD :ON
If option 3 from above list is dialed atStep 2
[201] STN ON/OFFAUTO TIMER :ON
If option 4 from above list is dialed atStep 2
[201] STN ON/OFFHEADSET USE :OFF
If option 5 from above list is dialed atStep 2
[201] STN ON/OFFHOT KEYPAD :ON
If option 6 from above list is dialed atStep 2
[201] STN ON/OFFKEYTONE :ON
If option 7 from above list is dialed atStep 2
[201] STN ON/OFFPAGE REJOIN :ON
If option 8 from above list is dialed atStep 2
[201] STN ON/OFFRING PREF. :ON
4. Press UP or DOWN to select ON or OFFPress the left or right soft key to return to step 2
[201] STN ON/OFFHOT KEYPAD :ON
5. Press the transfer key to store and exit
DCS 50si USER INSTRUCTIONSTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 JUNE 2001
1.17
1.13 SELECTING A RING TONE
Each keyset user can select one of eight ring frequencies.
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 111Display shows
[201] RING TONESELECTION 6
2. Dial 1–8 to select the ring toneOR
[201] RING TONESELECTION 5
Press UP or DOWN to select the ring tonePress the right soft key to move the cursor
3. Press the transfer key to store and exit
DCS 50si USER INSTRUCTIONSTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 JUNE 2001
1.18
1.14 ALARM REMINDER
Station users can have three alarms programmed at their phones. Each alarm may beone of the following three types:
0. NOTSET The alarm is not set.1. TODAY ONLY The alarm will ring at the programmed time and be canceled
automatically.2. DAILY The alarm will ring each day at this time.
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 112Display shows
[201] ALM CLK(1)HHMM: NOTSET
2. Dial 1–3 to select the alarm (e.g., 2)OR
[201] ALM CLK(2)HHMM: NOTSET
Press UP or DOWN to select alarmPress the right soft key to move the cursor
ORPress the left soft key to return to step 2
3. Enter alarm time in 24 hour format (e.g., 1300)Display automatically advances to step 5
[201] ALM CLK (2)HHMM:1300 NOTSET
4. Enter alarm type (e.g., 2)OR
[201] ALM CLKHHMM:1300 DAILY
Press UP or DOWN to select alarm typePress the right soft key to move the cursorand return to step 2
5. Press the transfer key to store and exit
DCS 50si USER INSTRUCTIONSTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 JUNE 2001
1.19
1.15 SETTING A PROGRAMMED MESSAGE
When you will be away from your phone for any length of time, you can leave a vacantstation message. Display stations calling you will see this message and be informed ofyour status or follow your instructions.
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 115Display shows
[201] PGMMSG(00)CANCEL VAC MSG
2. Dial 00–20 to select message number, e.g., 05OR
[201] PGMMSG(05)PAGE ME
Press UP or DOWN to select message
3. Press the LEFT or RIGHT soft key to return tostep 2
ORPress the transfer key to store and exit
DCS 50si USER INSTRUCTIONSTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 JUNE 2001
1.20
1.16 ALARM REMINDER WITH MESSAGE
Station users can have three alarms programmed at their phones. Each alarm may beone of the following three types:
0. NOTSET The alarm is not set.1. TODAY ONLY The alarm will ring at the programmed time and be canceled
automatically.2. DAILY The alarm will ring each day at this time.
In addition, each alarm may be accompanied by a 16 character message that will bedisplayed while the alarm is ringing.
NOTE: These are the same three alarms described in Alarm Reminder. This procedureallows a message to be added. A display keyset is necessary to view messages.
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 116Display shows
[201] ALM REM(1)HHMM: NOTSET
2. Dial 1–3 to select the alarm (e.g., 2)OR
[201] ALM REM(1)HHMM: NOTSET
Press UP or DOWN to select the alarmPress the right soft key to move the cursor
3. Enter the alarm time in 24 hour clock format(e.g., 1300)
[201] ALM REM (2)HHMM:1300 NOTSET
Display automatically advances to step 4
4. Dial the valid entry from the above list for thealarm type
[201] ALM REMHHMM:1300 DAILY
ORPress UP or DOWN to select the alarm typePress the right soft key to move the cursor
5. Enter messages using the method inProgramming Your Station’s Name
[201] ALM REMTAKE MEDICATION
Press the right soft key to return to step 2
6. Press the transfer key to store and exit
DCS 50si USER INSTRUCTIONSTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 JUNE 2001
1.21
1.17 CALLER ID DISPLAY
The station user can change the order in which the Caller ID information is displayed onan LCD set.
Caller ID display options are the following:
0. NO DISPLAY No Caller ID data will be displayed.
1. NUMBER FIRST The Caller ID number received from the Central Office will bedisplayed first.
2. NAME FIRST The Caller ID name received from the Central Office will bedisplayed first.
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 119Display shows current display mode
[201] CID DISPLAYNUMBER FIRST
2. Dial display option 0, 1 or 2, e.g., 2OR
[201] CID DISPLAYNAME FIRST
Press UP or DOWN to select option
3. Press the transfer key to store and exitOR
Press the speaker key to store and exit
DCS 50si USER INSTRUCTIONSTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 JUNE 2001
1.22
1.18 BACKGROUND MUSIC VOLUME
This procedure allows keyset users to view and adjust the level of background musicheard at their keysets.
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 117Display shows
[201] BGM VOLUMEVOLUME 13
2. Enter volume level (01-16) [201] BGM VOLUMEVOLUME 06
3. Press the transfer key to store and exit
TAB
LE O
F C
ON
TEN
TS
AB
OU
T TH
IS B
OO
K...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.1
THIN
GS
YO
U S
HO
ULD
KN
OW
......
......
......
......
....2
–9
AS
SE
MB
LIN
GY
OU
RK
EY
SE
T...
......
......
......
......
.....1
0
AD
DIN
GA
KE
YS
ET
DA
UG
HTE
RB
OA
RD
MO
DU
LE...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
...11
OU
TSID
E C
ALL
SM
akin
g an
Out
side
Cal
l...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.....1
2A
nsw
erin
g an
Out
side
Cal
l....
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
12U
nive
rsal
Ans
wer
....
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
..12
Rec
all/F
lash
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
..13
Bus
y Li
ne Q
ueui
ng w
ith C
allb
ack
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
....1
3C
ance
ling
Cal
lbac
k....
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
13
INTE
RC
OM
CA
LLS
Cal
ling
Oth
er S
tatio
ns...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.14
Ans
wer
ing
Inte
rcom
Cal
ls...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
...14
Ans
wer
Mod
es...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.14
Bus
y S
tatio
n C
allb
ack
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
....1
5B
usy
Sta
tion
Cam
p-on
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
....1
5C
allin
g Yo
ur S
yste
m O
pera
tor
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
....1
5
CA
LL P
RO
CE
SS
ING
Hol
ding
Cal
ls...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.....1
6–17
Tran
sfer
ring
Cal
ls...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
...17
–18
Tran
sfer
with
Cam
p-O
n....
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
18Tr
ansf
er to
Voi
ce M
ail.
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.....1
8C
all W
aitin
g...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.18
Con
fere
nce
Cal
ls...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
...19
Forw
ardi
ng C
alls
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
..19–
22C
all P
icku
p...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.22
SA
MS
UN
G D
CS
50s
i S
YS
TE
M
June
200
1
FAL
CO
N
KE
YS
ET
US
ER
GU
IDE
Eve
ry e
ffort
has
bee
n m
ade
to e
limin
ate
erro
rs a
nd a
mbi
guiti
es in
the
info
rmat
ion
cont
aine
d in
thi
sgu
ide.
Any
que
stio
ns c
once
rnin
g in
form
atio
n pr
esen
ted
here
sho
uld
be d
irect
ed to
SA
MS
UN
G T
ELE
-C
OM
MU
NIC
ATI
ON
S A
ME
RIC
A, 2
700
N.W
. 87t
h A
venu
e, M
iam
i, FL
331
72, t
elep
hone
(30
5) 5
92-2
900.
SA
MS
UN
G T
ELE
CO
MM
UN
ICA
TIO
NS
AM
ER
ICA
dis
clai
ms
all l
iabi
litie
s fo
r da
mag
es a
risin
g fro
m t
heer
rone
ous
inte
rpre
tatio
n or
use
of i
nfor
mat
ion
pres
ente
d in
this
gui
de.
CU
STO
MIZ
ING
YO
UR
KE
YS
ET
AM
E B
GM
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
34A
ME
Pas
swor
d...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.34
Ans
wer
Mac
hine
Em
ulat
ion
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
..34
Sel
ect R
ing
Tone
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
..35
Cha
nge
Your
Pas
scod
e...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.....3
5S
et A
nsw
er M
ode
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
35A
utom
atic
Hol
d...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.36
Hea
dset
Ope
ratio
n...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.36
Hot
Key
pad
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
....3
6K
ey C
onfir
mat
ion
Tone
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
....3
7R
ejoi
ning
a P
age
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
37R
ing
Pre
fere
nce
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
..37
DIS
PLA
Y F
EA
TUR
ES
Inte
ract
ive
Dis
play
Key
s...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.....3
8D
irect
ory
Info
rmat
ion
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
....3
8D
ial b
y D
irect
ory
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
..39
Cal
l Pro
gres
s D
ispl
ays
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
....3
9D
ispl
ay N
umbe
r D
iale
d....
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
39C
all D
urat
ion
Tim
er...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.39
Aut
o Ti
mer
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
....4
0Ti
mer
Fun
ctio
n...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.40
Vie
win
g M
essa
ge In
dica
tions
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
40A
larm
Rem
inde
r M
essa
ges
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
..40–
41P
erso
nal S
peed
Dia
l Nam
es...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
...41
Sta
tion
Nam
es...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.42
Man
agin
g K
ey A
ssig
nmen
ts...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.....4
2C
alle
r ID
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
..43–
46LC
R w
ith C
lear
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
....4
6
64 B
UT
TON
MO
DU
LE W
ITH
KE
YS
ET
......
......
..47
DIA
LIN
G F
EA
TUR
ES
Spe
ed D
ialin
g...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
...23
Pro
gram
min
g P
erso
nal S
peed
Dia
l Num
bers
......
......
......
......
....2
3–24
One
Tou
ch S
peed
Dia
ling
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
....2
4La
st N
umbe
r R
edia
l...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.....2
4S
ave
Num
ber
with
Red
ial.
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.....2
4C
hain
Dia
ling
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
25A
utom
atic
Red
ial/R
etry
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
....2
5P
ulse
to T
one
Cha
ngeo
ver.
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
...25
PA
GIN
G A
ND
ME
SS
AG
ING
Mak
ing
an In
tern
al P
age.
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.26
Mak
ing
an E
xter
nal P
age
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
26A
ll P
age
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
....2
6M
eet M
e P
age
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
27C
all P
ark
and
Pag
e...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.27
Mes
sage
s—S
et a
nd C
ance
l....
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
....2
7–28
Ret
urni
ng M
essa
ges.
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.28
Pro
gram
med
Mes
sage
s...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.....2
8
CO
NV
EN
IEN
CE
FE
ATU
RE
SD
o N
ot D
istu
rb...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.29
One
Tim
e D
ND
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
....2
9M
ute
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
..29
Bac
kgro
und
Mus
ic...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.29
App
oint
men
t Rem
inde
r/A
larm
Clo
ck...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
...30
Doo
r P
hone
Cal
ls...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
...30
–31
Exe
cutiv
e/S
ecre
tary
Hot
line
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
..31
Gro
up L
iste
ning
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
..31
Acc
ount
Cod
es...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.31
Lock
ing
Your
Key
set.
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.32
Off-
Hoo
k Vo
ice
Ann
ounc
e...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.32–
33O
HVA
Blo
ck...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.....3
3O
HVA
Rej
ect.
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.33
In G
roup
/Out
of G
roup
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
....3
3
AB
OU
T TH
IS B
OO
K
Your
FA
LCO
N k
eyse
t is
the
mos
t vi
sibl
e pa
rt o
f yo
ur t
elep
hone
sys
tem
. N
om
atte
r w
hat
mod
el k
eyse
t yo
u ar
e us
ing
tele
phon
e ca
lls a
re h
andl
ed t
hesa
me
way
. The
28B
and
18B
key
sets
hav
e ad
ditio
nal c
onve
nien
ces
that
are
not a
vaila
ble
to 8
B k
eyse
t use
rs. T
hese
are
not
ed th
roug
hout
this
gui
de.
Ple
ase
take
the
time
to s
tudy
this
gui
de a
nd to
bec
ome
fam
iliar
with
the
op-
erat
ion
of y
our
keys
et. K
eep
this
gui
de h
andy
. You
may
nee
d to
look
up
in-
stru
ctio
ns fo
r in
frequ
ently
use
d fe
atur
es.
Lear
ning
to u
se y
our k
eyse
t cor
rect
ly w
ill m
ake
ever
yday
tele
phon
e co
mm
u-ni
catio
ns a
bre
eze.
1
SV
Mi-
4...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
..48
Flow
Cha
rt...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
..49
Acc
essi
ng y
our
Mai
lbox
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
..49
Get
ting
Sta
rted
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
....5
0Li
sten
ing
to y
our
Mes
sage
s...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.....5
0M
essa
ge F
orw
ardi
ng O
ptio
ns...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
..51
Sen
ding
Mes
sage
s....
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
51P
erso
nal G
reet
ings
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
....5
2M
ailb
ox A
dmin
istr
atio
n...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.52
Per
sona
l Ser
vice
s...
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
...53
Key
set U
ser
Feat
ures
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
53In
tera
ctiv
e D
ispl
ays
for
SV
Mi-4
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
...54
PE
RS
ON
AL
SP
EE
DD
IAL
NU
MB
ER
S...
......
..55-
56
3
Your
out
side
cal
ls w
ill li
ght
gree
n on
you
r ke
yset
and
red
on
othe
r ke
yset
s.Yo
u ne
ver
lose
sig
ht o
f yo
ur c
alls
whi
le t
hey
are
on h
old.
The
y st
ay r
ight
whe
re y
ou p
ut th
em a
nd a
re id
entif
ied
with
a g
reen
flas
hing
ligh
t.
Som
e si
mpl
e ru
les
to r
emem
ber:
•A
ny s
tead
y LE
D in
dica
tes
the
line
or fe
atur
e is
in u
se.
•A
fast
flas
hing
gre
en L
ED
indi
cate
s a
new
cal
l rin
ging
in.
•A
slo
w fl
ashi
ng g
reen
or
red
LED
indi
cate
s a
call
is o
n ho
ld.
•A
slo
w fl
ashi
ng a
mbe
r LE
D in
dica
tes
a re
call
to y
our
keys
et.
SP
EA
KE
RP
HO
NE
All
FALC
ON
key
sets
are
spe
aker
pho
nes.
Pre
ssin
g A
NS
/RLS
key
will
ans
wer
or r
elea
se a
cal
l on
the
spe
aker
phon
e. S
witc
hing
fro
m t
he h
ands
et t
o th
esp
eake
rpho
ne is
eas
y. P
ress
the
SP
EA
KE
Rke
y an
d ha
ng u
p th
e ha
ndse
t.
VO
LUM
E C
ON
TRO
LSTh
e FA
LCO
N k
eyse
ts u
se t
he U
P a
nd D
OW
N k
eys
to a
djus
t th
e rin
ger
vol-
ume
whi
le th
e ke
yset
is ri
ngin
g, th
e sp
eake
r vol
ume
whi
le th
e sp
eake
rpho
neis
in u
se a
nd th
e ha
ndse
t vol
ume
whi
le y
ou a
re li
sten
ing.
The
se th
ree
leve
lsw
ill b
e st
ored
in m
emor
y un
til c
hang
ed. I
f bac
kgro
und
mus
ic is
turn
ed o
n at
your
key
set,
the
volu
me
keys
will
als
o co
ntro
l the
leve
l of m
usic
. The
vol
ume
of p
ages
hea
rd t
hrou
gh t
he s
peak
er o
f a
keys
et c
an b
e ad
just
ed d
urin
g a
page
ann
ounc
emen
t by
usin
g th
e vo
lum
e ke
ys. T
here
are
16
leve
ls fo
r ea
chvo
lum
e se
tting
. The
vol
ume
of o
ff-ho
ok r
ing
is c
ontr
olle
d by
a u
ser-
prog
ram
-m
able
set
ting.
TER
MIN
AL
STA
TUS
IN
DIC
ATO
RTh
e te
rmin
al s
tatu
s in
dica
tor
light
is p
ositi
oned
on
the
top
right
cor
ner
of th
eke
yset
abo
ve t
he d
ispl
ay.
The
term
inal
sta
tus
indi
cato
r is
a t
ri-co
lore
d (r
ed,
gree
n, a
nd a
mbe
r) li
ght t
hat p
rovi
des
grea
ter
visi
bilit
y of
you
r ke
yset
s st
atus
than
the
indi
vidu
al k
ey L
ED
s. T
he t
erm
inal
sta
tus
indi
cato
r pr
ovid
es t
he fo
l-lo
win
g in
dica
tions
:
•B
usy/
Off
Hoo
kS
tead
y R
ed•
Inte
rcom
Rin
gFl
ashi
ng R
ed•
Out
side
Cal
l Rin
gFl
ashi
ng G
reen
•R
ecal
l Rin
gFl
ashi
ng A
mbe
r•
Mes
sage
Wai
ting
Flas
hing
Red
•D
o N
ot D
istu
rbFa
st F
lash
Red
at 1
Sec
ond
Inte
rval
s
THIN
GS
YO
U S
HO
ULD
KN
OW
US
ER
OR
IEN
TATI
ON
FALC
ON
tel
epho
nes
are
calle
d “k
eyse
ts.”
The
y co
ntai
n bu
ttons
or
“key
s”th
at a
re u
sed
to a
cces
s or
act
ivat
e th
e m
any
feat
ures
of
your
offi
ce p
hone
syst
em. T
he k
eys
with
pap
er d
esig
natio
n st
rips
are
prog
ram
mab
le k
eys.
Thi
sm
eans
the
y ca
n be
pro
gram
med
for
a sp
ecifi
c fu
nctio
n on
you
r ke
yset
and
that
sam
e bu
tton
can
be s
omet
hing
diff
eren
t on
anot
her k
eyse
t. S
ee th
e sy
s-te
m m
anag
er t
o ge
t yo
ur m
ost
frequ
ently
use
d fe
atur
es a
ssig
ned
to y
our
prog
ram
mab
le k
eys.
Whe
n ch
ange
s ar
e m
ade,
be
sure
tha
t yo
ur p
rogr
am-
mab
le k
eys
are
rela
bele
d pr
oper
ly.
Line
s fro
m th
e te
leph
one
com
pany
are
“C
.O. l
ines
.” C
alls
on
thes
e lin
es a
rere
ferr
ed to
as
“out
side
cal
ls.”
You
r sy
stem
can
hav
e in
divi
dual
C.O
. lin
e ke
ysor
line
s m
ay b
e as
sign
ed t
o gr
oups
. Whe
n th
ey a
re in
a g
roup
, you
acc
ess
a lin
e by
dia
ling
an a
cces
s co
de o
r pre
ssin
g a
rout
e bu
tton.
For
exa
mpl
e, d
ial
9 or
pre
ss a
“LO
CA
L” k
ey to
get
a lo
cal o
utsi
de li
ne. I
f Lea
st C
ost R
outin
g is
used
, pr
essi
ng t
he “
LCR
” ke
y w
ill a
utom
atic
ally
sel
ect
a pr
epro
gram
med
C.O
. lin
e ac
cord
ing
to w
hat d
igits
are
dia
led.
Eac
h lin
e in
the
syst
em is
num
-be
red,
beg
inni
ng w
ith 7
01, t
hen
702,
703
, etc
.
Dire
ct S
tatio
n S
elec
tion
(DS
S)
keys
are
pro
gram
med
to
ring
spec
ific
sta-
tions
. Yo
u ca
n pr
ess
a D
SS
key
inst
ead
of d
ialin
g th
e ex
tens
ion
num
ber.
AD
SS
key
lig
hts
red
whe
n th
at s
tatio
n is
bus
y (B
usy
Lam
p In
dica
tion)
.
Falc
on k
eyse
ts p
rovi
de d
istin
ctiv
e rin
g pa
ttern
s:
•O
utsi
de c
alls
hav
e a
sing
le r
ing
tone
rep
eate
d.•
Inte
rnal
cal
ls h
ave
a do
uble
rin
g to
ne r
epea
ted.
•D
oor
phon
e ca
lls a
nd a
larm
/app
oint
men
t re
min
ders
hav
e a
trip
le r
ing
tone
rep
eate
d.
CA
LL I
ND
ICA
TIO
NS
The
keys
on
your
pho
ne h
ave
light
em
ittin
g di
odes
(LE
Ds)
. The
se a
re tr
i-col
-or
ed L
ED
s th
at li
ght g
reen
, red
or
ambe
r (g
reen
and
red
toge
ther
).
Inte
rcom
cal
ls,
also
cal
led
inte
rnal
cal
ls,
alw
ays
appe
ar o
n yo
ur C
ALL
but-
tons
. Th
ey w
ill a
lway
s lig
ht g
reen
. Yo
u ca
n ha
ve u
p to
eig
ht C
ALL
butto
ns,
but a
t lea
st tw
o ar
e re
com
men
ded.
Out
side
cal
ls a
ppea
r on
indi
vidu
al li
ne k
eys
if th
ey a
re a
ssig
ned.
Whe
n an
indi
vidu
al li
ne is
not
ass
igne
d to
its
own
key,
it w
ill a
ppea
r on
a C
ALL
butto
n.
2
5
28 B
UT
TON
FA
LCO
N K
EY
SE
T
Scro
ll
Call
1Ca
ll 2
Mes
sage
Mem
ory
Redi
al
Tran
sfer
Spea
ker
HOL
DAN
S/RL
SVo
lum
e
12
AB
C3
DE
F
4G
HI
5JK
L6
MN
O
7PQ
RS
8T
UV
9WX
YZ
0OP
ER
FALC
ON 2
8B
32 C
HA
RA
CTE
R D
ISP
LAY
Two
lines
with
16
char
acte
rs e
ach.
TER
MIN
AL
STA
TUS
IN
DIC
ATO
RU
sed
to p
rovi
de y
our
keys
et s
tatu
s.
SO
FT
KE
YS
Use
d to
act
i-va
te fe
atur
esvi
a th
e di
spla
y.
SC
RO
LL K
EY
Use
d to
scr
oll
thro
ugh
dis-
play
s.
20 P
RO
GR
AM
MA
BLE
KE
YS
WIT
H T
RI-
CO
LOR
ED
LIG
HTS
Use
d fo
r C
ALL
but
tons
, int
erco
mca
lls, o
utsi
de li
nes
and
man
y ot
her
syst
em fe
atur
es.
8 P
RO
GR
AM
MA
BLE
KE
YS
WIT
HTR
I-C
OLO
RE
D L
IGH
TS U
sed
toca
ll st
atio
ns d
irect
ly, t
o in
dica
tebu
sy c
ondi
tions
of o
ther
sta
tions
,fo
r O
ne T
ouch
dia
ling
and
man
yot
her
syst
em fe
atur
es.
VO
LUM
E C
ON
TRO
LK
EY
S U
sed
to s
et in
de-
pend
ent l
evel
s fo
r ha
ndse
t,sp
eake
r, ba
ckgr
ound
mus
ic, r
ing
and
page
vol
-um
es.
MIC
RO
-P
HO
NE
Fo
r ha
ndsf
ree
oper
atio
n.
AN
SW
ER
/RE
LEA
SE
KE
Y
HO
LD K
EY
SP
EA
KE
R
For
hand
s-fre
e op
era-
tion
and
ring-
ing.
4FEA
TUR
EA
CC
ES
SC
OD
ES
This
use
r gu
ide
is w
ritte
n ba
sed
on t
he d
efau
lt ac
cess
cod
e fo
r us
ing
sys-
tem
feat
ures
. If t
he s
yste
m n
umbe
ring
plan
has
bee
n ch
ange
d so
me
of th
eac
cess
cod
es m
ay n
ot b
e co
rrec
t. Yo
ur in
stal
ling
com
pany
can
info
rm y
ouof
the
corr
ect c
odes
.
SY
STE
M T
ON
ES
The
syst
em p
rovi
des
seve
ral t
ones
to
assi
st y
ou.
Som
e of
the
se t
ones
are
alre
ady
fam
iliar
to y
ou.
Inte
rco
mD
ialTo
ne—
Aste
ad
yto
ne
that
ind
icate
syo
ucan
beg
ind
ialin
g.
DIA
LT
ON
E
CO
NT
INU
OU
S
Rin
gb
ack
To
ne—
Ind
icate
sth
esta
tio
nyo
ud
iale
dis
rin
gin
g.
RIN
GB
AC
KT
ON
E—
10
00
ms
ON
/30
00
ms
OF
F
CO
NT
INU
OU
S
Bu
sy
To
ne—
Ind
icate
sth
esta
tio
nyo
ud
iale
dis
bu
sy.
BU
SY
TO
NE
—5
00
ms
ON
/50
0m
sO
FF
CO
NT
INU
OU
S
DN
D/N
oM
ore
Calls
To
ne—
Fast
bu
sy
ton
ein
dic
ate
sth
esta
tio
nyo
u
dia
led
isin
the
Do
No
tD
istu
rbm
od
eo
rcan
no
tre
ceiv
ean
ym
ore
calls.
DN
D/N
OM
OR
EC
ALLS
TO
NE
—2
50
ms
ON
/25
0m
sO
FF
FO
RT
EN
SE
CO
ND
S
Tra
nsfe
r/C
on
fere
nce
To
ne—
Ind
icate
syo
ur
call
isb
ein
gh
eld
an
dyo
u
can
dia
lan
oth
er
part
y.
TR
AN
SF
ER
/CO
NF
TO
NE
—1
00
ms
ON
/10
0m
sO
FF
CO
NT
INU
OU
S
Co
nfirm
atio
nTo
ne—
Very
sh
ort
beep
sfo
llo
wed
by
dia
lto
ne
ind
icate
yo
u
have
co
rrectly
set
or
can
cele
da
syste
mfe
atu
re.
CO
NF
IRM
AT
ION
TO
NE
—5
0m
sO
N/5
0m
sO
FF
FO
RO
NE
SE
CO
ND
(pro
gra
mm
ab
le)
Err
or
To
ne—
Ad
istin
ctive
two
levelb
eep
ing
ton
ein
dic
ate
syo
uh
ave
do
ne
so
meth
ing
inco
rrectly.
Try
ag
ain
.
ER
RO
RT
ON
E—
50
ms
ofto
ne
1/5
0m
so
fto
ne
2
FO
RT
HR
EE
SE
CO
ND
S
7
8 B
UT
TON
FA
LCO
N K
EY
SE
T
Scro
ll
HOL
DAN
S/RL
S
12
AB
C3
DE
F
4G
HI
5JK
L6
MN
O
7PQ
RS
8T
UV
9WX
YZ
0OP
ER
Call
1Ca
ll 2
Mes
sage
Tran
sfer
Spea
ker
VOLU
ME
FALC
ON 8
B
32 C
HA
RA
CTE
R D
ISP
LAY
Two
lines
with
16
char
acte
rs e
ach.
TER
MIN
AL
STA
TUS
IN
DIC
ATO
RU
sed
to p
rovi
de y
our
keys
et s
tatu
s.
SO
FT
KE
YS
Use
d to
activ
ate
feat
ures
via
the
disp
lay.
SC
RO
LL K
EY
Use
d to
scro
ll th
roug
h di
spla
ys.
8 P
RO
GR
AM
MA
BLE
KE
YS
WIT
HTR
I-C
OLO
RE
D L
IGH
TS U
sed
toca
ll st
atio
ns d
irect
ly, t
o in
dica
tebu
sy c
ondi
tions
of o
ther
sta
tions
,fo
r O
ne T
ouch
dia
ling
and
man
yot
her
syst
em fe
atur
es.
VO
LUM
E C
ON
TRO
LK
EY
S U
sed
to s
et in
de-
pend
ent l
evel
s fo
r ha
nd-
set,
spea
ker,
back
grou
ndm
usic
, rin
g an
d pa
ge v
ol-
umes
.
MIC
RO
PH
ON
E
For
hand
sfre
e op
era-
tion.
AN
SW
ER
/R
ELE
AS
E K
EY
HO
LD K
EY
SP
EA
KE
R
For
hand
s-fre
e op
era-
tion
and
ring-
ing.
618 B
UT
TON
FA
LCO
N K
EY
SE
T
Scro
ll
Call
1Ca
ll 2
Mes
sage
Mem
ory
Redi
al
Tran
sfer
Spea
ker
HOL
DAN
S/RL
SVo
lum
e
12
AB
C3
DE
F
4G
HI
5JK
L6
MN
O
7PQ
RS
8T
UV
9WX
YZ
0OP
ER
FALC
ON 1
8B
32 C
HA
RA
CTE
R D
ISP
LAY
Two
lines
with
16
char
acte
rs e
ach.
TER
MIN
AL
STA
TUS
IN
DIC
ATO
RU
sed
to p
rovi
de y
our
keys
et s
tatu
s.
SO
FT
KE
YS
Use
d to
act
i-va
te fe
atur
esvi
a th
e di
spla
y.
SC
RO
LL K
EY
Use
d to
scr
oll
thro
ugh
dis-
play
s.
10 P
RO
GR
AM
MA
BLE
KE
YS
WIT
H T
RI-
CO
LOR
ED
LIG
HTS
Use
d fo
r C
ALL
but
tons
, int
erco
mca
lls, o
utsi
de li
nes
and
man
y ot
her
syst
em fe
atur
es.
8 P
RO
GR
AM
MA
BLE
KE
YS
WIT
HTR
I-C
OLO
RE
D L
IGH
TS U
sed
toca
ll st
atio
ns d
irect
ly, t
o in
dica
tebu
sy c
ondi
tions
of o
ther
sta
tions
,fo
r O
ne T
ouch
dia
ling
and
man
yot
her
syst
em fe
atur
es.
VO
LUM
E C
ON
TRO
LK
EY
S U
sed
to s
et in
de-
pend
ent l
evel
s fo
r ha
ndse
t,sp
eake
r, ba
ckgr
ound
mus
ic, r
ing
and
page
vol
-um
es.
MIC
RO
-P
HO
NE
Fo
r ha
ndsf
ree
oper
atio
n.
AN
SW
ER
/RE
LEA
SE
KE
Y
HO
LD K
EY
SP
EA
KE
R
For
hand
s-fre
e op
era-
tion
and
ring-
ing.
KE
YS
ET
DA
UG
HTE
RM
OD
ULE
S[2
8 A
ND
18
BU
TTO
N K
EY
SE
TSO
NLY
]
Falc
on 2
8 an
d 18
but
ton
keys
ets
can
have
one
of
thre
e di
ffere
nt t
ypes
of
daug
her m
odul
e in
stal
led
on th
em to
enh
ance
the
oper
atio
n of
the
keys
et o
rto
pro
vide
an
addi
tiona
l loc
al p
ort d
epen
ding
on
the
type
of m
odul
e.
FALC
ON
KD
B-D
IGIT
AL
LIN
E
INTE
RFA
CE
(FK
DB
D)
If yo
ur k
eyse
t is
conn
ecte
d to
a D
igita
l Lin
e In
terfa
ce (
DLI
) po
rt th
at s
uppo
rts
2B+
D o
pera
tion
(you
r in
stal
ling
com
pany
can
det
erm
ine
this
) yo
u m
ayin
stal
l a d
augh
ter
mod
ule
that
pro
vide
s a
Dig
ital L
ine
Inte
rface
(D
LI)
port
for
conn
ectio
n of
a d
igita
l sta
tion
devi
ce s
uch
as a
key
set o
r 64
but
ton
mod
ule.
FALC
ON
KD
B-S
ING
LELI
NE
INTE
RFA
CE
(FK
DB
S)
If yo
ur k
eyse
t is
conn
ecte
d to
a D
igita
l Lin
e In
terfa
ce (
DLI
) po
rt th
at s
uppo
rts
2B+
D o
pera
tion
(you
r in
stal
ling
com
pany
can
det
erm
ine
this
) yo
u m
ayin
stal
l a d
augh
ter
mod
ule
that
pro
vide
s a
Sin
gle
Line
Inte
rface
(S
LI)
port
for
conn
ectio
n of
a s
tand
ard
tele
phon
e de
vice
suc
h as
a c
ordl
ess
phon
e.
FALC
ON
KD
B-F
ULL
DU
PLE
X (
FKD
BF)
The
stan
dard
spe
aker
phon
e m
ode
of o
pera
tion
for
a Fa
lcon
key
set
is “
half
dupl
ex”.
Thi
s m
eans
tha
t yo
u ca
nnot
tra
nsm
it an
d re
ceiv
e sp
eech
at
the
sam
e tim
e. A
ddin
g a
FKD
BF
to y
our
keys
et w
ill c
onve
rt t
he s
peak
erph
one
into
ful
l du
plex
mod
e en
hanc
ing
its o
pera
tion.
In
addi
tion
the
FKD
BF
may
have
up
to th
ree
(3) e
xter
nal m
icro
phon
es a
ttach
ed to
it fo
r con
fere
nce
room
type
ap
plic
atio
ns.
Thes
e m
icro
phon
es
requ
ire
an
“EX
TMIC
” ke
y pr
o-gr
amm
ed o
n th
e ke
yset
to a
ctiv
ate
or d
eact
ivat
e th
em.
9864
BU
TTO
N F
ALC
ON
AO
M
12
34
5
67
89
10
1112
1314
15
1617
1819
20
2122
2324
25
2627
2829
30
3132
3334
35
3637
3839
40
4142
4344
45
4647
4849
50
5152
5354
55
5657
5859
60
6162
6364
64 P
RO
GR
AM
MA
BLE
KE
YS
WIT
H R
ED
LIG
HTS
Use
d to
cal
lst
atio
ns d
irect
ly, t
o in
dica
te b
usy
cond
ition
s of
oth
er s
tatio
ns, f
orO
ne T
ouch
dia
ling
and
man
y ot
her
syst
em fe
atur
es.
11
AD
DIN
G A
KE
YS
ET
DA
UG
HTE
RB
OA
RD
MO
DU
LE•
Pla
ce th
e ke
yset
face
dow
n on
a fl
at s
urfa
ce.
•R
emov
e th
e ba
se p
edes
tal b
y pl
acin
g yo
ur th
umbs
ove
r th
e at
tach
men
tcl
ips
and
pres
s ou
twar
d w
hile
sim
ulta
neou
sly
pres
sing
dow
n on
the
key-
set b
ody
with
you
r fin
gert
ips.
•R
emov
e th
e tw
o kn
ocko
uts
from
the
botto
m o
f the
key
set.
•P
lug
in th
e da
ught
er m
odul
e an
d se
cure
with
the
two
scre
ws
prov
ided
.
10
AS
SE
MB
LIN
GY
OU
RK
EY
SE
T•
Pla
ce th
e ke
yset
face
dow
n on
a fl
at s
urfa
ce.
•R
emov
e th
e ba
se p
edes
tal b
y pl
acin
g yo
ur th
umbs
ove
r th
e at
tach
men
tcl
ips
and
pres
s ou
twar
d w
hile
sim
ulta
neou
sly
pres
sing
dow
n on
the
key-
set b
ody
with
you
r fin
gert
ips.
•P
lug
the
hand
set c
ord
into
the
jack
mar
ked
with
the
sym
bol.
•R
oute
the
hand
set c
ord
out t
he R
IGH
T si
de o
f the
key
set a
s yo
u lo
ok a
tit
face
dow
n.
•R
eatta
ch th
e ba
se p
edes
tal.
•P
lug
the
line
cord
into
the
jack
on
the
base
of t
he k
eyse
t mar
ked
with
the
sy
mbo
l and
rout
e it
thro
ugh
one
of th
e ca
ble
chan
nels
in th
e bo
ttom
of
the
base
ped
esta
l.
SE
CU
RIN
GS
CR
EW
S
RE
MO
VE
KN
OC
KO
UTS
RE
CA
LL D
IAL
TON
EP
ress
the
NE
Wbu
tton
to d
isco
nnec
t you
r ex
istin
g ca
ll, w
ait f
or d
ial t
one
and
then
mak
e a
new
cal
l on
the
sam
e lin
e.
NO
TE:
If th
is b
utto
n do
es n
ot a
ppea
r on
you
r ke
yset
, th
e FL
AS
Hke
y m
aybe
pro
gram
med
to r
ecal
l dia
l ton
e.
SE
ND
ING
A F
LAS
HW
hile
on
an o
utsi
de c
all,
pres
s th
e FL
AS
Hke
y to
sen
d a
flash
to
the
tele
-ph
one
com
pany
. Thi
s is
req
uire
d fo
r so
me
cust
om c
allin
g fe
atur
es o
r C
EN
-TR
EX
use
.
BU
SY
LIN
E Q
UE
UIN
G W
ITH
CA
LLB
AC
KIf
you
rece
ive
a bu
sy s
igna
l w
hen
you
are
sele
ctin
g an
out
side
lin
e, t
his
mea
ns th
at th
e lin
e or
gro
up o
f lin
es is
bus
y.
•P
ress
the
CB
Kke
y or
dia
l 44.
You
will
hea
r co
nfirm
atio
n to
ne.
•W
hen
the
line
beco
mes
free
, the
sys
tem
will
cal
l you
bac
k.•
Lift
the
hand
set
or p
ress
the
AN
S/R
LSke
y to
ans
wer
, w
ait
for
dial
ton
ean
d di
al th
e te
leph
one
num
ber
or s
peed
dia
l num
ber
agai
n.
NO
TES
:1.
A c
allb
ack
will
be
canc
eled
if
not
answ
ered
with
in 3
0 se
cond
s. I
f yo
uha
ve s
et a
cal
lbac
k, y
our
CB
Kke
y w
ill li
ght.
2.If
the
Hot
Key
pad
feat
ure
has
been
turn
ed o
ff, y
ou m
ust f
irst l
ift th
e ha
nd-
set o
r pr
ess
the
SP
EA
KE
Rke
y be
fore
dia
ling.
CA
NC
ELI
NG
CA
LLB
AC
KA
cal
lbac
k w
ill b
e ca
ncel
ed if
not
ans
wer
ed w
ithin
30
seco
nds.
If
you
have
set a
ca
llbac
k, y
our
CB
Kke
y w
ill li
ght.
Your
pho
ne m
ay h
ave
a m
axim
um o
f fiv
e ca
llbac
ks o
n st
atio
ns a
nd/o
r lin
esse
t at a
tim
e. T
o ca
ncel
a c
allb
ack:
•P
ress
the
CB
Kke
y or
dia
l 44.
You
will
hea
r co
nfirm
atio
n to
ne.
•W
hile
you
are
list
enin
g to
con
firm
atio
n to
ne,
pres
s th
e H
OLD
key.
Thi
sw
ill c
ance
l the
old
est c
allb
ack
that
you
hav
e se
t.
NO
TES
:1.
If th
e ho
t ke
ypad
fea
ture
is t
urne
d of
f, yo
u m
ust
first
lift
the
hand
set
orpr
ess
the
SP
EA
KE
Rke
y be
fore
dia
ling.
1312
OU
TSID
E C
ALL
SM
AK
ING
AN
OU
TSID
E C
ALL
•Li
ft th
e ha
ndse
t and
pre
ss a
n id
le o
utsi
de li
ne b
utto
n, li
ne g
roup
but
ton
or d
ial a
line
acc
ess
code
to
rece
ive
dial
ton
e—O
R—
pres
s an
idle
out
-si
de li
ne b
utto
n, li
ne g
roup
but
ton
or d
ial a
line
acc
ess
code
to
rece
ive
dial
tone
thro
ugh
the
spea
ker—
OR
—pr
ess
SP
EA
KE
Rre
ceiv
e in
terc
omdi
al to
ne a
nd d
ial a
line
acc
ess
code
.•
Dia
l the
tele
phon
e nu
mbe
r.•
Fini
sh th
e ca
ll by
rep
laci
ng th
e ha
ndse
t or
pres
sing
the
AN
S/R
LSke
y.
NO
TE:
You
will
rece
ive
No
Mor
e C
alls
tone
whe
n yo
u at
tem
pt to
mak
e a
call
and
ther
e is
no
key
avai
labl
e fo
r th
at li
ne.
•If
Leas
t Cos
t Rou
ting
is e
nabl
ed o
n yo
ur p
hone
sys
tem
, thi
s bu
tton
may
be la
bele
d LC
Ror
acc
esse
d by
dia
ling
an a
cces
s co
de (
usua
lly 9
).•
If yo
ur s
yste
m i
s pr
ogra
mm
ed t
o re
quire
an
auth
oriz
atio
n co
de b
efor
em
akin
g a
call,
dia
l ✱pl
us a
val
id c
ode
befo
re s
elec
ting
a C
.O. l
ine.
•
If yo
ur s
yste
m is
pro
gram
med
to
requ
ire a
n ac
coun
t co
de b
efor
e m
ak-
ing
a ca
ll, p
ress
the
AC
CT
butto
n or
dia
l 47
plus
a v
alid
cod
e, p
ress
the
AC
CT
butto
n ag
ain
and
then
sel
ect a
C.O
. lin
e.
For
mor
e in
form
atio
n on
aut
horiz
atio
n an
d ac
coun
t cod
es, s
ee y
our
syst
emad
min
istr
ator
.
NO
TE:
If th
e H
ot K
eypa
d fe
atur
e ha
s be
en t
urne
d of
f, yo
u m
ust
first
lift
the
hand
set o
r pr
ess
the
SP
EA
KE
Rke
y be
fore
dia
ling.
AN
SW
ER
ING
AN
OU
TSID
E C
ALL
•Li
ft th
e ha
ndse
t and
you
are
aut
omat
ical
ly c
onne
cted
to th
e rin
ging
cal
l. S
ee R
ing
Pre
fere
nce
unde
r C
usto
miz
ing
Your
Key
set—
OR
—pr
ess
the
AN
S/R
LSke
y to
aut
omat
ical
ly a
nsw
er o
n th
e sp
eake
rpho
ne.
NO
TE:
If a
call
is fl
ashi
ng a
t you
r ke
yset
but
not
rin
ging
, you
mus
t pre
ss th
efla
shin
g bu
tton
to a
nsw
er.
UN
IVE
RS
AL
AN
SW
ER
Out
side
line
s m
ay b
e pr
ogra
mm
ed t
o rin
g a
gene
ral a
lert
ing
devi
ce.
To a
n-sw
er c
alls
rin
ging
thi
s de
vice
, di
al 6
7or
pre
ss t
he U
Ake
y. T
his
devi
ce c
anop
erat
e in
the
Day
or
Nig
ht m
ode.
NO
TE:
If th
e H
ot K
eypa
d fe
atur
e ha
s be
en t
urne
d of
f, yo
u m
ust
first
lift
the
hand
set o
r pr
ess
the
SP
EA
KE
Rke
y be
fore
dia
ling.
BU
SY
STA
TIO
N C
ALL
BA
CK
Whe
n yo
u ca
ll an
othe
r st
atio
n an
d re
ceiv
e a
busy
sig
nal:
•P
ress
the
CB
Kke
y or
dia
l 44.
•W
hen
the
busy
sta
tion
beco
mes
free
, you
r ke
yset
will
rin
g.
•Li
ft th
e ha
ndse
t or
pres
s A
NS
/RLS
to c
all t
he n
ow id
le s
tatio
n.
NO
TES
:1.
A c
allb
ack
will
be
canc
eled
if
not
answ
ered
with
in 3
0 se
cond
s. I
f yo
uha
ve s
et a
cal
lbac
k, y
our
CB
Kke
y w
ill li
ght.
2.If
the
Hot
Key
pad
feat
ure
has
been
turn
ed o
ff, y
ou m
ust f
irst l
ift th
e ha
nd-
set o
r pr
ess
the
SP
EA
KE
Rke
y be
fore
dia
ling.
BU
SY
STA
TIO
N C
AM
P-O
NW
hen
you
call
anot
her s
tatio
n an
d re
ceiv
e a
busy
sig
nal b
ut y
ou d
o no
t wan
tto
wai
t for
a c
allb
ack:
•P
ress
the
CA
MP
key
or d
ial 4
5.•
The
calle
d st
atio
n w
ill r
ecei
ve o
ff-ho
ok r
ing
tone
rep
eate
d ev
ery
few
sec
-on
ds a
nd it
s fir
st a
vaila
ble
CA
LLbu
tton
will
flas
h gr
een
to in
dica
te y
our
call
is w
aitin
g.•
Wai
t for
the
calle
d pa
rty
to a
nsw
er.
•Th
e ca
lled
stat
ion
mus
t rel
ease
its
first
cal
l or
plac
e it
on h
old
befo
re a
n-sw
erin
g yo
ur c
amp-
on.
NO
TES
:1.
If yo
u re
ceiv
e N
o M
ore
Cal
ls to
ne, t
hat s
tatio
n ha
s no
ava
ilabl
e ke
y to
ac-
cept
you
r ca
ll. H
ang
up o
r le
ave
a m
essa
ge.
2.If
the
Hot
Key
pad
feat
ure
has
been
turn
ed o
ff, y
ou m
ust f
irst l
ift th
e ha
nd-
set o
r pr
ess
the
SP
EA
KE
Rke
y be
fore
you
beg
in d
ialin
g.
CA
LLIN
G Y
OU
R S
YS
TEM
OP
ER
ATO
R•
Dia
l 0to
cal
l you
r sy
stem
ope
rato
r or
gro
up o
f ope
rato
rs.
•If
you
wan
t to
call
a sp
ecifi
c op
erat
or, d
ial t
hat p
erso
n’s
exte
nsio
n nu
m-
ber.
NO
TE:
If th
e H
ot K
eypa
d fe
atur
e ha
s be
en t
urne
d of
f, yo
u m
ust
first
lift
the
hand
set o
r pr
ess
the
SP
EA
KE
Rke
y be
fore
you
beg
in d
ialin
g.
1514
INTE
RC
OM
CA
LLS
CA
LLIN
G O
THE
R S
TATI
ON
S•
Dia
l the
ext
ensi
on n
umbe
r or
gro
up n
umbe
r.•
Wai
t for
the
part
y to
ans
wer
. If y
ou h
ear a
brie
f ton
e bu
rst i
nste
ad o
f rin
g-ba
ck t
one,
the
sta
tion
you
calle
d is
set
for
Voi
ce A
nnou
nce
or A
uto
Ans
wer
. Beg
in s
peak
ing
imm
edia
tely
afte
r th
e to
ne.
•Fi
nish
the
call
by r
epla
cing
the
hand
set o
r pr
essi
ng th
e A
NS
/RLS
key.
NO
TES
:1.
If yo
u ha
ve a
DS
Ske
y as
sign
ed t
o an
ext
ensi
on o
r st
atio
n gr
oup,
you
may
pre
ss th
is k
ey in
stea
d of
dia
ling
the
num
ber.
2.If
the
Hot
Key
pad
feat
ure
has
been
turn
ed o
ff, y
ou m
ust f
irst l
ift th
e ha
nd-
set o
r pr
ess
the
SP
EA
KE
Rke
y be
fore
you
beg
in d
ialin
g.
AN
SW
ER
ING
IN
TER
CO
M C
ALL
S•
Whe
n yo
ur
keys
et
ring
s,
sim
ply
lif
t th
e ha
ndse
t—O
R—
pre
ss
the
AN
S/R
LSke
y to
be
conn
ecte
d to
the
calli
ng s
tatio
n.
•Fi
nish
the
call
by r
epla
cing
the
hand
set o
r pr
essi
ng th
e A
NS
/RLS
key.
See
Rin
g P
refe
renc
eun
der
Cus
tom
izin
g Yo
ur K
eyse
t.
VO
ICE
AN
NO
UN
CE
MO
DE
(IN
TER
CO
M C
ALL
S O
NLY
)W
hen
anot
her
stat
ion
calls
you
, you
r ke
yset
will
sou
nd a
brie
f atte
ntio
n to
nean
d yo
u w
ill h
ear
the
calle
r’s a
nnou
ncem
ent.
•P
ress
AN
S/R
LSto
turn
on
the
mic
roph
one
and
spea
k ha
ndsf
ree—
OR
—lif
t the
han
dset
to r
eply
.•
To fi
nish
the
call,
rep
lace
the
hand
set o
r pr
ess
the
AN
S/R
LSke
y.
AU
TO A
NS
WE
R M
OD
E(I
NTE
RC
OM
CA
LLS
ON
LY)
Whe
n an
othe
r st
atio
n ca
lls y
ou, y
our
keys
et w
ill s
ound
a b
rief a
ttent
ion
tone
and
then
aut
omat
ical
ly a
nsw
er th
e ca
ll.
•Yo
ur m
icro
phon
e an
d sp
eake
r ar
e tu
rned
on
and
you
can
spea
k ha
nds-
free.
For
priv
acy,
use
the
hand
set.
•To
fini
sh th
e ca
ll, r
epla
ce th
e ha
ndse
t or
pres
s th
e A
NS
/RLS
key.
•If
you
do n
ot a
nsw
er th
is r
ecal
l with
in a
pre
-pro
gram
med
per
iod
of ti
me,
it w
ill g
o to
the
syst
em o
pera
tor.
CO
NS
ULT
ATI
ON
HO
LDW
hen
you
are
talk
ing
on a
n ou
tsid
e lin
e an
d it
is n
eces
sary
to
cons
ult
with
anot
her
exte
nsio
n:
•P
ress
the
TRA
NS
FER
key;
you
will
rec
eive
tran
sfer
dia
l ton
e. Y
our
call
ispl
aced
on
tran
sfer
hol
d.
•D
ial t
he e
xten
sion
num
ber.
•C
onsu
lt w
ith th
e in
tern
al p
arty
. •
Pre
ss T
RA
NS
FER
to r
etur
n to
the
out
side
par
ty o
r ha
ng u
p to
tra
nsfe
rth
e ca
ll.
NO
TE:
Rep
eate
dly
pres
sing
the
TR
AN
SFE
Rke
y w
ill t
oggl
e be
twee
n th
eou
tsid
e p
arty
and
inte
rnal
ext
ensi
on.
RE
TRIE
VIN
G C
ALL
S H
ELD
AT
AN
OTH
ER
STA
TIO
NW
hen
a lin
e is
on
hold
and
it a
ppea
rs o
n yo
ur k
eyse
t, pr
ess
the
line
butto
nw
ith th
e re
d fla
shin
g lig
ht.
Whe
n a
line
is o
n ho
ld a
nd it
doe
s no
t ap
pear
on
your
key
set,
dial
12
plus
the
line
num
ber
or t
he e
xten
sion
num
ber
of t
he s
tatio
n th
at p
lace
d th
e ca
llon
hol
d.
NO
TE:
If th
e H
ot K
eypa
d fe
atur
e ha
s be
en t
urne
d of
f, yo
u m
ust
first
lift
the
hand
set o
r pr
ess
the
SP
EA
KE
Rke
y be
fore
you
beg
in d
ialin
g.
TRA
NS
FER
RIN
G C
ALL
STr
ansf
er is
use
d to
sen
d an
y ca
ll to
ano
ther
ext
ensi
on in
one
of
two
way
s.Yo
u ca
n do
a s
cree
ned
tran
sfer
by
info
rmin
g th
e ot
her
exte
nsio
n w
ho is
cal
l-in
g or
you
can
do
a bl
ind
tran
sfer
with
out n
otifi
catio
n.
•W
hile
on
a ca
ll, p
ress
the
TRA
NS
FER
key
and
dial
an
exte
nsio
n nu
mbe
ror
gro
up n
umbe
r. Yo
ur c
all i
s au
tom
atic
ally
put
on
tran
sfer
hol
d.O
RP
ress
a D
SS
key
or s
tatio
n gr
oup
key.
You
r ca
ll is
aut
omat
ical
ly p
ut o
ntr
ansf
er h
old.
•H
ang
up w
hen
you
hear
ring
ing
(thi
s is
an
unsc
reen
ed o
r blin
d tr
ansf
er).
OR
Wai
t fo
r th
e ca
lled
part
y to
ans
wer
and
adv
ise
him
/her
of
the
call
and
hang
up.
If th
e tr
ansf
er is
refu
sed,
you
will
be
reco
nnec
ted
to th
e ou
tsid
e 1716
CA
LL P
RO
CE
SS
ING
SY
STE
M H
OLD
•W
hen
you
are
conn
ecte
d to
any
cal
l, pr
ess
HO
LD.
The
call
will
fla
shgr
een
at y
our
keys
et.
If th
is c
all a
ppea
rs o
n a
line
key
at o
ther
key
sets
,it
will
flas
h re
d at
thos
e ke
yset
s.•
To ta
ke th
e ca
ller
off h
old,
pre
ss th
at k
ey a
nd th
e gr
een
flash
ing
light
will
go s
tead
y gr
een
agai
n. R
esum
e th
e co
nver
satio
n.
NO
TE:
Whi
le o
n a
call,
pre
ssin
g a
line
key,
rou
te k
ey o
r fla
shin
g C
ALL
but
-to
n w
ill a
utom
atic
ally
put
you
r fir
st c
all o
n ho
ld a
nd c
onne
ct y
ou to
the
new
call.
See
Aut
omat
ic H
old
unde
r C
usto
miz
ing
Your
Key
set.
EX
CLU
SIV
E H
OLD
To p
lace
an
outs
ide
call
on h
old
at y
our p
hone
so
that
oth
er u
sers
can
not g
et it
:
•P
ress
the
HO
LDbu
tton
twic
e. T
he c
all
will
fla
sh g
reen
on
your
key
set
and
this
line
will
sho
w a
ste
ady
red
light
on
othe
r ke
yset
s.•
To r
etrie
ve t
he c
all,
pres
s th
e fla
shin
g gr
een
line
butto
n or
pre
ss t
heH
OLD
butto
n a
third
tim
e.
NO
TE:
Inte
rcom
cal
ls w
ill a
lway
s be
pla
ced
on e
xclu
sive
hol
d.
RE
MO
TE H
OLD
Whe
n yo
u w
ish
to p
lace
a c
all o
n ho
ld a
t ano
ther
sta
tion.
Pre
ss T
RA
NS
FER
and
dial
the
sta
tion
num
ber
(or
pres
s th
e ap
prop
riate
DS
S k
ey).
Pre
ss t
heH
OLD
key
. Thi
s w
ill p
lace
the
call
on s
yste
m h
old
on a
n av
aila
ble
CA
LL b
ut-
ton
or L
ine
Key
at t
he r
emot
e st
atio
n an
d re
turn
you
to d
ial t
one.
NO
TES
:1.
If th
e de
stin
atio
n st
atio
n do
es n
ot h
ave
any
free
CA
LL b
utto
ns o
r lin
eke
ys y
ou w
ill h
ear
No
Mor
e C
alls
tone
and
mus
t ret
urn
to th
e ot
her
part
yby
pre
ssin
g th
e TR
AN
SFE
Rke
y (o
r the
RE
TUR
N s
oft k
ey in
the
disp
lay)
.2.
Inte
rcom
cal
ls c
anno
t be
rem
ote
held
.
HO
LD R
EC
ALL
If yo
u le
ave
a ca
ll on
hol
d lo
nger
tha
n th
e ho
ld t
imer
, it
will
rec
all y
our
sta-
tion.
The
but
ton
that
the
call
appe
ars
on w
ill h
ave
a sl
ow fl
ashi
ng a
mbe
r lig
ht.
•W
hen
your
pho
ne ri
ngs,
lift
the
hand
set o
r pre
ss th
e A
NS
/RLS
key
to a
n-sw
er th
e re
call.
Fini
sh th
e fir
st c
all a
nd h
ang
up; t
he w
aitin
g ca
ll w
ill r
ing.
•Li
ft th
e ha
ndse
t or
pres
s th
e A
NS
/RLS
key
to a
nsw
er.
NO
TE: I
nter
com
cal
ls w
ill n
ot g
o on
Aut
omat
ic H
old.
CO
NFE
RE
NC
E C
ALL
SYo
u m
ay c
onfe
renc
e up
to fi
ve p
artie
s (y
ou a
nd fo
ur o
ther
s) in
any
com
bina
-tio
n of
out
side
line
s an
d in
tern
al s
tatio
ns in
any
ord
er.
•W
hile
eng
aged
in a
con
vers
atio
n, p
ress
the
CO
NF
key
and
rece
ive
con-
fere
nce
tone
.•
Mak
e an
othe
r ca
ll, e
ither
inte
rcom
or
outs
ide,
pre
ss th
e C
ON
Fke
y an
dre
ceiv
e co
nfer
ence
tone
.•
Mak
e an
othe
r ca
ll or
pre
ss th
e C
ON
Fke
y to
join
all
part
ies.
•R
epea
t the
last
ste
p un
til a
ll pa
rtie
s ar
e ad
ded.
NO
TE:
Whe
n at
tem
ptin
g to
add
ano
ther
par
ty to
the
conf
eren
ce a
nd y
ou a
reno
t abl
e to
rea
ch th
e de
sire
d pe
rson
, han
g up
. Sim
ply
pres
s th
e C
ON
Fke
yag
ain
to r
etur
n to
you
r pr
evio
us c
onve
rsat
ion.
To d
rop
a pa
rty
from
you
r co
nfer
ence
cal
l:
•P
ress
CO
NF
and
dial
the
exte
nsio
n or
line
num
ber t
hat i
s to
be
drop
ped.
•P
ress
CO
NF
agai
n to
ree
stab
lish
the
conf
eren
ce.
NO
TE: T
o le
ave
the
conf
eren
ce, h
ang
up. C
ontr
ol is
pas
sed
to th
e ne
xt in
ter-
nal
stat
ion.
If
ther
e ar
e no
int
erna
l st
atio
ns a
nd y
ou w
ish
to l
eave
out
side
lines
con
nect
ed to
geth
er in
a tr
unk
to tr
unk
conf
eren
ce, p
ress
the
CO
NF
key
plus
the
CA
LLbu
tton
that
the
cal
l app
ears
on
or f
ollo
w t
he in
stru
ctio
ns t
odr
op a
par
ty a
nd u
se y
our
exte
nsio
n nu
mbe
r. W
hen
they
han
g up
, the
line
sw
ill r
elea
se a
utom
atic
ally
. Pre
ss C
ON
Fto
rej
oin
a tr
unk
to tr
unk
conf
eren
ce.
FOR
WA
RD
ING
CA
LLS
Yo
u m
ay fo
rwar
d yo
ur c
alls
to a
noth
er s
tatio
n, g
roup
of s
tatio
ns o
r an
ext
er-
nal t
elep
hone
num
ber.
Pro
gram
a d
estin
atio
n fo
r th
e ty
pe o
f for
war
ding
you
wan
t as
det
aile
d be
low
. If
you
have
FW
D A
LL,
FWD
BU
SY
and
FWD
NO
AN
SW
ER
keys
, pre
ss o
ne to
turn
that
forw
ard
feat
ure
on. A
ste
ady
red
light
rem
inds
you
wha
t for
war
d co
nditi
on is
act
ivat
ed.
You
can
clea
r all
call
forw
ard
cond
ition
s se
t at y
our s
tatio
n by
lifti
ng th
e ha
nd-
set a
nd d
ialin
g 60
0.
19
line
whe
n th
e ca
lled
stat
ion
hang
s up
or
you
can
pres
s TR
AN
SFE
Rto
retu
rn to
the
outs
ide
part
y. If
you
wis
h to
sen
d th
e ca
ll to
ano
ther
ext
en-
sion
with
out
wai
ting
for
the
first
sta
tion
to h
ang
up, s
impl
y pr
ess
anot
h-er
DS
Sbu
tton.
OR
Pre
ss th
e C
ALL
butto
n or
C.O
. lin
e ke
y to
retu
rn to
the
outs
ide
part
y an
dbe
gin
the
tran
sfer
pro
cess
aga
in.
Whe
n yo
u ar
e tr
ansf
errin
g a
call
to a
key
set s
et fo
r Vo
ice
Ann
ounc
e or
Aut
oA
nsw
er, t
he tr
ansf
erre
d ca
ll w
ill a
lway
s rin
g.
NO
TES
:1.
Afte
r th
e in
side
pa
rty
answ
ers,
yo
u m
ay
alte
rnat
e ba
ck
and
fort
hbe
twee
n th
e pa
rtie
s by
pre
ssin
g th
e TR
AN
SFE
Rke
y.2.
If yo
u re
ceiv
e N
o M
ore
Cal
ls to
ne, t
hat s
tatio
n ha
s no
key
ava
ilabl
e to
re-
ceiv
e an
othe
r ca
ll. P
ress
TR
AN
SFE
Rto
ret
urn
to th
e ot
her
part
y.3.
You
cann
ot t
rans
fer
an I
nter
com
cal
l by
pres
sing
a D
SS
key
. Yo
u m
ust
pres
s th
e TR
AN
SFE
Rke
y an
d di
al th
e de
stin
atio
n ex
tens
ion
num
ber.
TRA
NS
FER
WIT
H C
AM
P-O
NW
hen
you
are
tran
sfer
ring
a ca
ll to
ano
ther
sta
tion
and
you
rece
ive
a bu
sysi
gnal
, you
may
cam
p th
e ca
ll on
to
this
sta
tion.
Sim
ply
hang
up
whe
n yo
uhe
ar th
e bu
sy s
igna
l. Th
e ca
lled
part
y w
ill b
e al
erte
d th
at a
cal
l is
wai
ting
for
them
.
NO
TE:
If yo
u re
ceiv
e N
o M
ore
Cal
ls t
one,
tha
t st
atio
n ha
s no
key
ava
ilabl
eto
rec
eive
ano
ther
cal
l. P
ress
TR
AN
SFE
Rto
ret
urn
to th
e ou
tsid
e ca
ller.
TRA
NS
FER
TO
VO
ICE
MA
ILTh
is f
eatu
re is
use
d to
sen
d a
call
dire
ctly
to
a vo
ice
mai
lbox
. Yo
ur k
eyse
tm
ust h
ave
a co
rrec
tly p
rogr
amm
ed V
Tke
y to
acc
ompl
ish
this
. To
tran
sfer
aca
ll di
rect
ly to
a v
oice
mai
lbox
:
•W
hile
on
a ca
ll, p
ress
the
VT
key
and
dial
the
mai
lbox
num
ber.
•H
ang
up w
hen
dial
ing
is c
ompl
eted
.
CA
LL W
AIT
ING
If an
out
side
cal
l has
bee
n ca
mpe
d-on
to y
our
phon
e or
ano
ther
sta
tion
has
cam
ped-
on to
you
:
•Yo
ur k
eyse
t will
rin
g an
d th
e ca
ll th
at is
wai
ting
for
you
(cam
ped-
on)
will
flash
gre
en.
•P
ress
the
flash
ing
butto
n to
ans
wer
; you
r ot
her
call
will
go
on h
old
auto
-m
atic
ally
if y
our
stat
ion
has
the
Aut
omat
ic H
old
feat
ure
set.
If no
t, yo
um
ust p
ress
HO
LDan
d th
en th
e fla
shin
g bu
tton.
OR
18
FOR
WA
RD
FO
LLO
W M
EW
hen
you
wan
t all
calls
to y
our
exte
nsio
n fo
rwar
ded
to th
e ex
tens
ion
whe
reyo
u ar
e no
w:
•D
ial 6
05pl
us y
our
exte
nsio
n nu
mbe
r.•
Rec
eive
con
firm
atio
n to
ne a
nd h
ang
up.
If yo
u w
ant a
spe
cific
ext
ensi
on’s
cal
ls fo
rwar
ded
to y
our p
hone
(Rem
ote
Cal
lFo
rwar
d):
•D
ial 6
05pl
us th
e de
sire
d ex
tens
ion
num
ber.
•R
ecei
ve c
onfir
mat
ion
tone
and
han
g up
.
NO
TE:
If th
e H
ot K
eypa
d fe
atur
e ha
s be
en t
urne
d of
f, yo
u m
ust
first
lift
the
hand
set o
r pr
ess
the
SP
EA
KE
Rke
y be
fore
you
beg
in d
ialin
g.
FOR
WA
RD
TO
AN
EX
TER
NA
L N
UM
BE
RTo
for
war
d ou
tsid
e ca
lls t
o a
num
ber
outs
ide
of y
our
busi
ness
, yo
u m
ust
have
a F
WD
EX
TER
NA
L bu
tton
on y
our
keys
et.
•W
hile
on-
hook
, pre
ss T
RA
NS
FER
and
then
dia
l 102
.•
Dia
l 6.
•D
ial
the
trun
k or
tru
nk g
roup
acc
ess
code
fol
low
ed b
y th
e te
leph
one
num
ber
that
you
wan
t.•
Pre
ss T
RA
NS
FER
to s
tore
.•
Pre
ss F
WD
EX
TER
NA
Lto
turn
the
feat
ure
on a
nd p
ress
it a
gain
to tu
rnth
e fe
atur
e of
f.
NO
TES
:1.
Ext
erna
l Cal
l For
war
d w
ill c
ance
l all
othe
r ca
ll fo
rwar
ding
inst
ruct
ions
.2.
If th
e H
ot K
eypa
d fe
atur
e ha
s be
en tu
rned
off,
you
mus
t firs
t lift
the
hand
-se
t or
pres
s th
e S
PE
AK
ER
key
befo
re y
ou b
egin
dia
ling.
FOR
WA
RD
DN
DTo
forw
ard
your
pho
ne w
hen
you
activ
ate
DN
D.
•D
ial 6
07pl
us th
e ex
tens
ion
num
ber
or g
roup
num
ber.
•R
ecei
ve c
onfir
mat
ion
tone
and
han
g up
.
NO
TE:
1.If
the
Hot
Key
pad
feat
ure
has
been
turn
ed o
ff yo
u m
ust f
irst l
ift th
e ha
nd-
set o
r pr
ess
the
SP
EA
KE
Rke
y be
fore
you
beg
in d
ialin
g.
2120FO
RW
AR
D A
LL C
ALL
STo
forw
ard
all y
our
calls
und
er a
ny c
ondi
tion
to a
noth
er s
tatio
n:
•D
ial 6
01pl
us th
e ex
tens
ion
or g
roup
num
ber.
•R
ecei
ve c
onfir
mat
ion
tone
and
han
g up
.
NO
TES
:1.
If th
e H
ot K
eypa
d fe
atur
e ha
s be
en tu
rned
off,
you
mus
t firs
t lift
the
hand
-se
t or
pres
s th
e S
PE
AK
ER
key
befo
re y
ou b
egin
dia
ling.
2.Th
e st
atio
n th
at r
ecei
ves
a Fo
rwar
ded
All
call
can
tran
sfer
the
call
to th
efo
rwar
ded
stat
ion.
Thi
s is
use
ful
whe
n yo
u ar
e ex
pect
ing
an i
mpo
rtan
tca
ll bu
t you
do
not w
ish
to b
e di
stur
bed
by o
ther
cal
ls.
3.W
hen
a st
atio
n us
er p
lace
s hi
s/he
r ke
yset
in
Forw
ard
All
mod
e an
dhe
/she
doe
s no
t ha
ve a
FO
RW
AR
D A
LLke
y, t
he T
RA
NS
FER
key
will
light
to
indi
cate
For
war
d A
ll ha
s be
en s
et a
nd c
alls
to
this
sta
tion
have
been
tran
sfer
red
else
whe
re.
FOR
WA
RD
BU
SY
To fo
rwar
d ca
lls to
ano
ther
sta
tion
whe
n yo
u ar
e on
the
phon
e:
•D
ial 6
02pl
us th
e ex
tens
ion
or g
roup
num
ber.
•R
ecei
ve c
onfir
mat
ion
tone
and
han
g up
.
NO
TE:
If th
e H
ot K
eypa
d fe
atur
e ha
s be
en t
urne
d of
f, yo
u m
ust
first
lift
the
hand
set o
r pr
ess
SP
EA
KE
Rbe
fore
you
beg
in d
ialin
g.
FOR
WA
RD
NO
AN
SW
ER
To fo
rwar
d ca
lls to
ano
ther
sta
tion
whe
n yo
u do
not
ans
wer
:
•D
ial 6
03pl
us th
e ex
tens
ion
or g
roup
num
ber.
•R
ecei
ve c
onfir
mat
ion
tone
and
han
g up
.
NO
TE:
If th
e H
ot K
eypa
d fe
atur
e ha
s be
en t
urne
d of
f, yo
u m
ust
first
lift
the
hand
set o
r pr
ess
the
SP
EA
KE
Rke
y be
fore
you
beg
in d
ialin
g.
FOR
WA
RD
BU
SY
/NO
AN
SW
ER
If yo
u ha
ve b
oth
a Fo
rwar
d on
Bus
y de
stin
atio
n an
d a
Forw
ard
No
Ans
wer
dest
inat
ion
prog
ram
med
, you
may
set
bot
h of
thes
e at
the
sam
e tim
e:
•D
ial 6
04.
•R
ecei
ve c
onfir
mat
ion
tone
and
han
g up
.
NO
TE:
If th
e H
ot K
eypa
d fe
atur
e ha
s be
en t
urne
d of
f, yo
u m
ust
first
lift
the
hand
set o
r pr
ess
the
SP
EA
KE
Rke
y be
fore
you
beg
in d
ialin
g.
23
DIA
LIN
G F
EA
TUR
ES
SP
EE
D D
IALI
NG
Yo
u ca
n di
al a
pre
prog
ram
med
tele
phon
e nu
mbe
r sto
red
in th
e sy
stem
-wid
esp
eed
dial
lis
t of
num
bers
500
–999
or
from
you
r pe
rson
al l
ist
of n
umbe
rs00
–49:
•W
ith th
e ha
ndse
t on-
hook
, pre
ss th
e M
EM
OR
Yke
y or
dia
l 16.
•D
ial t
he d
esire
d sp
eed
dial
num
ber.
•Th
e te
leph
one
num
ber
is a
utom
atic
ally
dia
led
for
you.
NO
TE:
If th
e H
ot K
eypa
d fe
atur
e ha
s be
en t
urne
d of
f, yo
u m
ust
first
lift
the
hand
set o
r pr
ess
the
SP
EA
KE
Rke
y be
fore
you
beg
in d
ialin
g.
PR
OG
RA
MM
ING
PE
RS
ON
AL
SP
EE
DD
IAL
NU
MB
ER
SYo
u ca
n pr
ogra
m fr
eque
ntly
dia
led
tele
phon
e nu
mbe
rs in
a p
erso
nal s
peed
dial
list
. A s
tatio
n m
ay b
e as
sign
ed u
p to
fifty
num
bers
, 00–
49. S
ee y
our s
ys-
tem
adm
inis
trat
or to
det
erm
ine
the
amou
nt a
ssig
ned
to y
our
stat
ion.
•W
hile
on-
hook
, pre
ss T
RA
NS
FER
and
then
dia
l 105
.•
Dia
l a s
peed
dia
l num
ber
(00–
49).
•D
ial a
line
or
line
grou
p ac
cess
cod
e.•
Dia
l the
tel
epho
ne n
umbe
r to
be
stor
ed (
18 d
igits
max
imum
). It
can
in-
clud
e #
, ✱, F
LAS
H a
nd P
AU
SE
.•
Pre
ss T
RA
NS
FER
to s
tore
the
num
ber.
NO
TE:
If th
e H
ot K
eypa
d fe
atur
e ha
s be
en t
urne
d of
f, yo
u m
ust
first
lift
the
hand
set o
r pr
ess
the
SP
EA
KE
Rke
y be
fore
you
beg
in d
ialin
g.
For
the
purp
oses
of
prog
ram
min
g sp
eed
dial
num
bers
, th
e pr
ogra
mm
able
keys
are
kno
wn
as A
, B, C
, D, E
and
Fan
d ar
e de
fined
bel
ow.
Trans
fer
Spea
ker
AB
CD
EF
AC
ETr
ansf
er
Spea
ker
VOLU
ME
BD
F
28B
KE
YS
ET
18B
KE
YS
ET
DE
FAU
LTP
RO
GR
AM
MIN
GK
EY
SLA
YO
UT
8B K
EY
SE
T D
EFA
ULT
PR
OG
RA
MM
ING
KE
YS
LAY
OU
T
CA
LL F
OR
WA
RD
OP
TIO
NS
A d
ispl
ay k
eyse
t m
ay r
evie
w o
r ch
ange
cal
l fo
rwar
d op
tions
and
des
tina-
tions
. C
all f
orw
ard
acce
ss c
an b
e do
ne v
ia t
he k
eypa
d or
by
acce
ssin
g th
eke
yset
dis
play
feat
ures
. To
revi
ew o
r ch
ange
cal
l for
war
d op
tions
:
•P
ress
TR
AN
SFE
R 1
02.
•D
ial 0
-6to
sel
ect t
he fo
rwar
d ty
pe (
e.g.
, 1)
OR
Pre
ss U
Por
DO
WN
to s
elec
t the
forw
ard
type
Pre
ss th
e rig
ht s
oft k
ey to
mov
e th
e cu
rsor
•D
ial t
he d
estin
atio
n nu
mbe
r (e
.g.,
202)
OR
Pre
ss U
Por
DO
WN
to s
elec
t the
des
tinat
ion
Pre
ss th
e rig
ht s
oft k
ey to
mov
e th
e cu
rsor
•D
ial 1
to s
et O
RP
ress
UP
or D
OW
Nto
sel
ect Y
ES
or N
O•
Pre
ss T
RS
Fto
sto
re a
nd e
xit
STA
TIO
N C
ALL
PIC
KU
PTo
pic
k up
(an
swer
) a
call
ringi
ng a
t ano
ther
sta
tion,
lift
the
hand
set a
nd d
ial
65pl
us th
e ex
tens
ion
num
ber
of th
e rin
ging
pho
ne.
NO
TE:
If th
e H
ot K
eypa
d fe
atur
e ha
s be
en t
urne
d of
f, yo
u m
ust
first
lift
the
hand
set o
r pr
ess
the
SP
EA
KE
Rke
y be
fore
you
beg
in d
ialin
g.
GR
OU
P C
ALL
PIC
KU
PTo
pic
k up
(an
swer
) a
call
ringi
ng in
any
pic
kup
grou
p, li
ft th
e ha
ndse
t an
ddi
al 6
6pl
us th
e de
sire
d gr
oup
num
ber
01–2
0or
pre
ss th
e fla
shin
g G
RO
UP
PIC
KU
Pke
y if
avai
labl
e.
NO
TES
:1.
A g
roup
pic
kup
key
can
have
an
exte
nder
for
a sp
ecifi
c pi
ckup
gro
up.
2.If
the
Hot
Key
pad
feat
ure
has
been
turn
ed o
ff, y
ou m
ust f
irst l
ift th
e ha
nd-
set o
r pr
ess
the
SP
EA
KE
Rke
y be
fore
dia
ling
the
acce
ss c
ode.
3.S
tatio
n an
d gr
oup
pick
up f
eatu
res
cann
ot b
e us
ed t
o an
swer
rec
alls
to
a st
atio
n, o
nly
new
rin
ging
cal
ls a
nd o
pera
tor
reca
lls.
22
NO
TES
:1.
If th
e H
ot K
eypa
d fe
atur
e ha
s be
en tu
rned
off,
you
mus
t firs
t lift
the
hand
-se
t or
pres
s th
e S
PE
AK
ER
key
befo
re y
ou b
egin
dia
ling.
2.Th
e sa
ved
tele
phon
e nu
mbe
r is
sto
red
in m
emor
y un
til y
ou s
ave
anot
h-er
num
ber.
3.R
edia
l doe
s no
t app
ly to
inte
rcom
cal
ls.
CH
AIN
DIA
LIN
GYo
u m
ay m
anua
lly d
ial
addi
tiona
l di
gits
fol
low
ing
a sp
eed
dial
num
ber
orch
ain
as m
any
spee
d di
al n
umbe
rs to
geth
er a
s re
quire
d:
•A
fter
the
first
spe
ed n
umbe
r is
dia
led,
pre
ss M
EM
OR
Yag
ain
and
dial
anot
her
spee
d nu
mbe
r O
Rm
anua
lly d
ial
addi
tiona
l di
gits
fol
low
ing
asp
eed
dial
num
ber.
AU
TOM
ATI
C R
ED
IAL/
RE
TRY
Whe
n yo
u ar
e m
akin
g an
out
side
cal
l and
you
rece
ive
a bu
sy s
igna
l, th
e sy
s-te
m c
an a
utom
atic
ally
red
ial t
he n
umbe
r fo
r yo
u. It
will
aut
omat
ical
ly r
edia
lat
a p
re-p
rogr
amm
ed in
terv
al fo
r up
to 1
5 at
tem
pts.
•W
hen
you
hear
a b
usy
sign
al, p
ress
the
RE
TRY
butto
n.•
The
syst
em w
ill r
eser
ve th
e lin
e an
d au
tom
atic
ally
red
ial t
he s
ame
num
-be
r for
you
. You
will
hea
r the
cal
l bei
ng m
ade
thro
ugh
the
keys
et s
peak
-er
. The
mic
roph
one
is m
uted
.•
Whe
n th
e ca
lled
part
y an
swer
s, y
ou m
ust p
ick
up th
e ha
ndse
t or
pres
sth
e A
NS
/RLS
key
befo
re y
ou c
an b
egin
spe
akin
g. Y
ou m
ust
answ
erw
ithin
10
seco
nds.
NO
TES
:1.
If yo
u m
ake
anot
her
call,
aut
o-re
dial
is c
ance
led.
2.
To c
ance
l a r
etry
, lift
and
rep
lace
the
hand
set.
PU
LSE
TO
TO
NE
CH
AN
GE
OV
ER
Whe
n m
akin
g an
out
side
cal
l on
a di
al p
ulse
line
, pre
ss #
. All
digi
ts d
iale
daf
ter
the
# w
ith b
e se
nt a
s to
nes.
25
•Th
e A
key
is n
ot u
sed.
•Th
e B
key
inse
rts
a fla
sh.
•Th
e C
key
inse
rts
a pa
use.
•Th
e D
key
is u
sed
for
puls
e to
ton
e co
nver
sion
. If
your
sys
tem
use
sro
tary
(or
pul
se)
dial
ing
C.O
. lin
es,
pres
sing
Dw
hile
ent
erin
g a
spee
ddi
al n
umbe
r ca
uses
all
subs
eque
nt d
igits
to b
e se
nt a
s D
TMF
tone
s.•
The
Eke
y is
use
d to
hid
e di
gits
. Dis
play
key
set u
sers
may
wan
t to
hide
som
e sp
eed
dial
num
bers
so
that
they
will
not
sho
w in
the
disp
lay.
Whe
nyo
u ar
e en
terin
g a
tele
phon
e nu
mbe
r, pr
ess
E. A
ll su
bseq
uent
dig
its w
illbe
hid
den.
Pre
ss E
agai
n to
beg
in d
ispl
ayin
g di
gits
.•
The
Fke
y is
use
d to
ent
er a
nam
e. S
ee P
erso
nal
Spee
d D
ial
Nam
esun
der
Dis
play
Fea
ture
s.•
Use
the
HO
LDke
y to
cle
ar a
spe
ed d
ial n
umbe
r.
ON
E T
OU
CH
SP
EE
D D
IALI
NG
You
may
ass
ign
any
spee
d di
al n
umbe
r to
an
alre
ady
exis
ting
One
Tou
chS
peed
Dia
l but
ton
for
quic
k an
d ea
sy d
ialin
g of
freq
uent
ly u
sed
num
bers
.
•W
hile
on-
hook
, pre
ss T
RA
NS
FER
and
then
dia
l 107
.•
Pre
ss a
One
Tou
ch S
peed
Dia
l but
ton.
•D
ial t
he s
peed
dia
l num
ber
(00–
49or
500
–999
) th
at y
ou w
ant a
ssig
ned
to th
is b
utto
n.•
Pre
ss T
RA
NS
FER
to s
tore
you
r se
lect
ion.
To c
all t
his
tele
phon
e nu
mbe
r, ju
st p
ress
the
One
Tou
ch S
peed
Dia
l but
ton.
NO
TE:
If th
e H
ot K
eypa
d fe
atur
e ha
s be
en t
urne
d of
f, yo
u m
ust
first
lift
the
hand
set o
r pr
ess
the
SP
EA
KE
R k
ey b
efor
e yo
u be
gin
dial
ing.
LAS
T N
UM
BE
R R
ED
IAL
To re
dial
the
last
tele
phon
e nu
mbe
r you
dia
led,
pre
ss th
e R
ED
IAL
key
or d
ial
19.
NO
TES
:1.
If th
e H
ot K
eypa
d fe
atur
e ha
s be
en tu
rned
off,
you
mus
t firs
t lift
the
hand
-se
t or
pres
s th
e S
PE
AK
ER
key
befo
re y
ou b
egin
dia
ling.
2.R
edia
l doe
s no
t app
ly to
inte
rcom
cal
ls.
SA
VE
NU
MB
ER
WIT
H R
ED
IAL
To s
ave
the
num
ber
you
just
dia
led
for
late
r us
e, p
ress
the
SN
R k
ey b
efor
eha
ngin
g up
.
To r
edia
l thi
s sa
ved
num
ber
at a
ny t
ime,
pre
ss t
he S
NR
key
or d
ial 1
7. T
hesa
me
line
will
be
sele
cted
for
you.
24
27
ME
ET
ME
PA
GE
•Li
ft th
e ha
ndse
t.•
Pre
ss th
e M
eet M
e P
age
(MM
PG
) ke
y or
dia
l 54.
•D
ial t
he d
esire
d zo
ne n
umbe
r.•
Afte
r th
e at
tent
ion
tone
, ins
truc
t the
pag
ed p
erso
n to
dia
l 56.
•P
ress
WA
ITor
TR
AN
SFE
R.
•R
emai
n of
f-hoo
k un
til th
e pe
rson
dia
ls 5
6fro
m a
ny p
hone
.•
The
page
d pe
rson
will
be
auto
mat
ical
ly c
onne
cted
with
you
.
CA
LL P
AR
K A
ND
PA
GE
Whe
n yo
u ha
ve a
n ou
tsid
e ca
ll fo
r so
meo
ne w
ho is
not
at h
is/h
er d
esk,
you
can
park
the
call
and
page
the
requ
este
d pa
rty:
•W
hile
in c
onve
rsat
ion,
pre
ss t
he P
AG
Ebu
tton.
The
cal
l is
auto
mat
ical
lypa
rked
at y
our
stat
ion.
•D
ial
the
desi
red
page
zon
e an
d an
noun
ce “
park
” an
d yo
ur e
xten
sion
num
ber
or th
e lin
e nu
mbe
r. H
ang
up.
To r
etrie
ve a
par
ked
call:
•D
ial 1
0pl
us t
he n
umbe
r th
at w
as a
nnou
nced
. If
you
have
a P
AR
Kke
y,pr
ess
it an
d di
al th
e nu
mbe
r th
at w
as a
nnou
nced
.•
You
will
be
conn
ecte
d to
the
park
ed c
all.
NO
TES
:1.
If th
e pa
rked
cal
l is
not
ret
rieve
d w
ithin
a p
re-p
rogr
amm
ed p
erio
d of
time,
it w
ill r
ecal
l you
r ke
yset
and
hav
e a
slow
flas
hing
am
ber
light
. You
cann
ot p
ark
and
page
inte
rcom
cal
ls.
2.If
the
Hot
Key
pad
feat
ure
has
been
turn
ed o
ff, y
ou m
ust f
irst l
ift th
e ha
nd-
set o
r pr
ess
the
SP
EA
KE
Rke
y be
fore
you
beg
in d
ialin
g.
SE
TTI
NG
A M
ES
SA
GE
IN
DIC
ATI
ON
Whe
n yo
u ar
e ca
lling
ano
ther
sta
tion
and
no o
ne a
nsw
ers
or y
ou r
ecei
ve a
busy
sig
nal,
you
can
leav
e a
mes
sage
indi
catio
n:
•P
ress
the
ME
SS
AG
Eke
y or
dia
l 43
and
rece
ive
conf
irmat
ion
tone
.•
Han
g up
. Th
e M
ES
SA
GE
key
on t
he c
alle
d st
atio
n w
ill li
ght.
Sta
ndar
dte
leph
ones
rec
eive
spe
cial
dia
l ton
e as
a m
essa
ge in
dica
tion.
NO
TES
:1.
A s
tatio
n ca
n ha
ve u
p to
five
mes
sage
indi
catio
ns.
2.If
the
Hot
Key
pad
feat
ure
has
been
turn
ed o
ff, y
ou m
ust f
irst l
ift th
e ha
nd-
set o
r pr
ess
the
SP
EA
KE
Rke
y be
fore
you
beg
in d
ialin
g.
PA
GIN
G A
ND
ME
SS
AG
ING
MA
KIN
G A
N I
NTE
RN
AL
PA
GE
To m
ake
an a
nnou
ncem
ent t
hrou
gh th
e ke
yset
spe
aker
s:
•Li
ft th
e ha
ndse
t.•
Pre
ss th
e P
AG
Eke
y or
dia
l 55.
•D
ial t
he d
esire
d zo
ne n
umbe
r 1,
2, 3
or 4
.O
RD
ial 0
to p
age
all i
nter
nal z
ones
.•
Afte
r th
e at
tent
ion
tone
, mak
e yo
ur a
nnou
ncem
ent.
NO
TE:
If yo
u ha
ve a
ded
icat
ed p
age
zone
key
, it
is n
ot n
eces
sary
to
pres
sP
AG
Ean
d di
al a
zon
e nu
mbe
r.
MA
KIN
G A
N E
XTE
RN
AL
PA
GE
To m
ake
an a
nnou
ncem
ent t
hrou
gh th
e ex
tern
al p
agin
g sp
eake
rs:
•Li
ft th
e ha
ndse
t.•
Pre
ss th
e P
AG
Eke
y or
dia
l 55.
•D
ial t
he d
esire
d zo
ne n
umbe
r 5,
6, 7
or 8
.O
RD
ial 9
to p
age
all e
xter
nal z
ones
.•
Afte
r th
e at
tent
ion
tone
, mak
e yo
ur a
nnou
ncem
ent.
NO
TE:
If yo
u ha
ve a
ded
icat
ed p
age
zone
key
, it
is n
ot n
eces
sary
to
pres
sP
AG
Ean
d di
al a
zon
e nu
mbe
r.
ALL
PA
GE
To p
age
all d
esig
nate
d ke
yset
s an
d ex
tern
al s
peak
ers
at th
e sa
me
time:
•Li
ft th
e ha
ndse
t.•
Pre
ss th
e P
AG
Eke
y or
dia
l 55.
•D
ial ✱
or p
ress
the
ALL
PA
GE
key.
•A
fter
the
atte
ntio
n to
ne, m
ake
your
ann
ounc
emen
t.
NO
TE:
The
LED
on
the
PA
GE
key
will
onl
y lig
ht w
hen
an A
ll P
age
is i
npr
ogre
ss.
26
29
CA
NC
ELI
NG
ME
SS
AG
ES
To c
ance
l a m
essa
ge in
dica
tion
that
you
left
at a
noth
er s
tatio
n, d
ial 4
2pl
usth
e ex
tens
ion
num
ber
of th
e st
atio
n at
whi
ch y
ou le
ft a
mes
sage
.
To c
ance
l all
mes
sage
indi
catio
ns le
ft at
you
r key
set,
dial
42
plus
you
r ext
en-
sion
. You
r M
ES
SA
GE
light
will
go
out.
NO
TE:
If th
e H
ot K
eypa
d fe
atur
e ha
s be
en t
urne
d of
f, yo
u m
ust
first
lift
the
hand
set o
r pr
ess
the
SP
EA
KE
Rke
y be
fore
you
beg
in d
ialin
g.
RE
TUR
NIN
G M
ES
SA
GE
S•
Pre
ss th
e M
ES
SA
GE
key
or d
ial 4
3. T
he fi
rst s
tatio
n th
at le
ft a
mes
sage
will
be
calle
d au
tom
atic
ally
. If
that
sta
tion
does
not
ans
wer
, yo
ur M
ES
-S
AG
Elig
ht w
ill s
tay
on.
•R
epea
t unt
il al
l mes
sage
s ha
ve b
een
retu
rned
in th
e or
der
rece
ived
.•
Your
ME
SS
AG
Elig
ht w
ill t
urn
off
whe
n al
l m
essa
ges
have
bee
n re
-tu
rned
.
NO
TES
:1.
Dis
play
key
set
user
s ca
n vi
ew m
essa
ge in
dica
tions
and
ret
urn
them
inan
y or
der.
See
Vie
win
g M
essa
ge In
dica
tions
unde
r D
ispl
ay F
eatu
res.
2.If
the
Hot
Key
pad
feat
ure
has
been
turn
ed o
ff, y
ou m
ust f
irst l
ift th
e ha
nd-
set o
r pr
ess
the
SP
EA
KE
Rke
y be
fore
you
beg
in d
ialin
g.3.
If a
mes
sage
has
bee
n le
ft at
you
r ke
yset
by
a ke
yset
in A
uto
Ans
wer
,yo
u m
ust m
anua
lly c
ance
l the
mes
sage
afte
r it
has
been
ret
urne
d.
PR
OG
RA
MM
ED
ME
SS
AG
ES
Whe
n yo
u w
ill b
e aw
ay fr
om y
our
phon
e fo
r an
y le
ngth
of t
ime,
leav
e a
pro-
gram
med
sta
tion
mes
sage
. D
ispl
ay s
tatio
ns c
allin
g yo
u w
ill s
ee t
his
mes
-sa
ge a
nd b
e in
form
ed o
f you
r st
atus
or
follo
w y
our
inst
ruct
ions
.
•D
ial 4
8pl
us a
ny o
f the
mes
sage
cod
es 0
1–20
liste
d on
the
back
of t
his
user
gui
de.
•To
can
cel t
his
mes
sage
, dia
l 48
plus
00.
NO
TE:
If th
e H
ot K
eypa
d fe
atur
e ha
s be
en t
urne
d of
f, yo
u m
ust
first
lift
the
hand
set o
r pr
ess
the
SP
EA
KE
Rke
y.
You
can
have
mul
tiple
pro
gram
med
mes
sage
key
s an
d ea
ch o
ne c
an h
ave
a di
ffere
nt m
essa
ge c
ode:
•P
ress
any
pro
gram
med
mes
sage
key
. Th
e m
essa
ge is
set
and
the
key
will
ligh
t red
. Pre
ss th
e ke
y ag
ain
to tu
rn o
ff.•
Pre
ssin
g an
othe
r pr
ogra
mm
ed m
essa
ge k
ey w
ill t
urn
the
prev
ious
one
off a
nd s
et a
new
pro
gram
med
mes
sage
.
28
CO
NV
EN
IEN
CE
FE
ATU
RE
SD
O N
OT
DIS
TUR
BU
se th
is fe
atur
e w
hen
you
wan
t to
bloc
k ca
lls to
you
r ke
yset
.
•W
hile
on-
hook
, pre
ss th
e D
ND
key
or d
ial 4
01. T
he D
ND
key
flash
es to
rem
ind
you
of th
is m
ode.
•To
can
cel
DN
D,
pres
s th
e D
ND
key
agai
n or
dia
l 40
0. T
he D
ND
light
turn
s of
f. Yo
u ca
n m
ake
calls
whi
le in
the
DN
D m
ode.
NO
TES
:1.
If th
e H
ot K
eypa
d fe
atur
e ha
s be
en tu
rned
off,
you
mus
t firs
t lift
the
hand
-se
t or
pres
s th
e S
PE
AK
ER
key.
2.If
you
plac
e yo
ur k
eyse
t in
DN
D m
ode
and
you
do n
ot h
ave
a D
ND
key,
your
TS
Ike
y w
ill fl
ash
to in
dica
te D
ND
sta
tus.
ON
E T
IME
DN
DIf
you
are
on a
cal
l and
you
do
not w
ish
to b
e in
terr
upte
d w
hile
on
that
cal
l,yo
u ca
n pr
ess
the
DN
Dke
y an
d pl
ace
your
sta
tion
in D
o N
ot D
istu
rb. W
hen
you
hang
up
at th
e en
d of
the
call,
DN
D w
ill b
e au
tom
atic
ally
can
cele
d an
dyo
ur k
eyse
t w
ill b
e ab
le t
o re
ceiv
e ne
w c
alls
. Th
is f
eatu
re r
equi
res
a D
ND
key. MU
TEYo
u ca
n m
ute
the
hand
set t
rans
mitt
er o
r th
e m
icro
phon
e du
ring
any
conv
er-
satio
n:
•P
ress
the
MU
TEke
y. It
will
ligh
t red
.•
To r
esum
e sp
eaki
ng, p
ress
the
MU
TEbu
tton
agai
n. T
he li
ght t
urns
off.
BA
CK
GR
OU
ND
MU
SIC
Whe
n a
mus
ic s
ourc
e is
sup
plie
d, y
ou m
ay l
iste
n to
mus
ic t
hrou
gh t
hesp
eake
r in
you
r ke
yset
:
•W
hile
on-
hook
, pre
ss th
e H
OLD
butto
n to
hea
r m
usic
.•
Pre
ss th
e H
OLD
butto
n ag
ain
to tu
rn m
usic
off.
You
can
set t
he le
vel o
f bac
kgro
und
mus
ic b
y us
ing
the
VO
LUM
Eke
ys w
hile
liste
ning
to th
e m
usic
. Thi
s do
es n
ot a
ffect
the
spea
kerp
hone
leve
l.
•D
ial t
he e
xten
sion
num
ber
of th
e do
or p
hone
.•
You
will
be
conn
ecte
d to
the
doo
r ph
one
and
you
can
liste
n or
hav
e a
conv
ersa
tion.
•If
an e
lect
ric d
oor
lock
rel
ease
is in
stal
led,
dia
l 13
to u
nloc
k th
e do
or.
NO
TE:
If th
e H
ot K
eypa
d fe
atur
e ha
s be
en t
urne
d of
f, yo
u m
ust
first
lift
the
hand
set o
r pr
ess
the
SP
EA
KE
Rke
y.
EX
EC
UTI
VE
/SE
CR
ETA
RY
HO
T LI
NE
If pr
ogra
mm
ed,
an e
xecu
tive
and
a se
cret
ary
can
have
a h
ot li
ne b
etw
een
them
. Whe
n th
e ex
ecut
ive
stat
ion
is in
the
DN
D m
ode,
all
of it
s ca
lls w
ill r
ing
the
secr
etar
y st
atio
n.
•E
ither
per
son
can
pres
s th
e B
OS
S k
ey to
mak
e a
voic
e ca
ll to
the
othe
rst
atio
n.•
Usi
ng th
e ho
t lin
e w
ill o
verr
ide
DN
D a
t the
oth
er s
tatio
n. T
his
key
will
ligh
tre
d w
hen
the
othe
r st
atio
n is
in u
se.
To t
rans
fer
a ca
ll to
a B
oss
Sta
tion
in D
ND
:
•P
ress
the
TRA
NS
FER
key
follo
wed
by
the
BO
SS
key.
•W
ait f
or th
e B
OS
Sto
ans
wer
to a
nnou
nce
the
call
and
hang
up
to c
om-
plet
e th
e tr
ansf
er O
R•
Han
g up
to c
ompl
ete
a bl
ind
tran
sfer
afte
r pr
essi
ng th
e B
OS
Ske
y.
GR
OU
P L
ISTE
NIN
GW
hen
you
are
enga
ged
on a
cal
l and
you
are
usi
ng t
he h
ands
et,
you
may
wan
t oth
er p
eopl
e to
hea
r th
e di
stan
t par
ty’s
voi
ce o
ver
the
spea
ker:
•P
ress
the
LIS
TEN
key
to tu
rn o
n th
e sp
eake
r. Th
e m
icro
phon
e is
not
inus
e, s
o th
e di
stan
t pa
rty
does
not
hea
r ot
her
part
ies
pres
ent
in y
our
of-
fice.
•P
ress
LIS
TEN
agai
n to
turn
the
spea
ker
off a
nd r
esum
e pr
ivat
e co
nver
-sa
tion.
•R
epea
t if n
eces
sary
.
NO
TE:
Dep
endi
ng o
n sp
eake
r vo
lum
e an
d th
e ac
oust
ics
of y
our
offic
e, i
tm
ay b
e ad
visa
ble
to t
urn
the
grou
p lis
teni
ng fe
atur
e of
f bef
ore
hang
ing
up.
This
will
elim
inat
e a
mom
enta
ry s
quea
l.
AC
CO
UN
T C
OD
ES
Whe
n eq
uipp
ed w
ith o
ptio
nal e
quip
men
t, yo
ur s
yste
m w
ill a
llow
cal
ls t
o be
char
ged
to a
spe
cific
acc
ount
:
•D
urin
g an
y ou
tsid
e C
.O. c
all,
pres
s th
e ac
coun
t (A
CC
T) k
ey.
3130A
PP
OIN
TME
NT
RE
MIN
DE
R/A
LAR
MC
LOC
KTh
is f
eatu
re w
orks
lik
e an
ala
rm c
lock
. U
se i
t to
rem
ind
your
self
of a
n ap
-po
intm
ent
late
r in
the
day
(TO
DAY
ON
LY)
or a
s a
daily
rem
inde
r ev
ery
day
(DA
ILY
). Y
ou c
an s
et u
p to
thr
ee a
larm
s. E
ach
one
can
be e
ither
a T
OD
AYO
NLY
or
a D
AIL
Y a
larm
.
Whe
n th
e al
arm
rin
gs,
you
will
hea
r th
ree
shor
t rin
gs r
epea
ted
thre
e tim
es.
Lift
the
hand
set
to a
nsw
er t
he a
larm
. If
you
do n
ot,
the
alar
m w
ill a
lert
you
two
mor
e tim
es a
t fiv
e m
inut
e in
terv
als.
To s
et a
larm
s:
•P
ress
TR
AN
SFE
Ran
d th
en d
ial 1
12.
•D
ial t
he a
larm
num
ber
1, 2
or 3
.•
Dia
l th
e tim
e at
whi
ch y
ou w
ant
the
alar
m t
o so
und.
Ent
er t
he t
ime
asH
HM
M (
hour
s an
d m
inut
es)
usin
g th
e 24
hou
r cl
ock.
•D
ial 0
(NO
T S
ET)
, 1(T
OD
AY O
NLY
) or 2
(DA
ILY
) to
sele
ct th
e al
arm
type
.•
Pre
ss T
RA
NS
FER
to s
ave.
•R
epea
t for
eac
h al
arm
if n
eede
d.
To c
ance
l ind
ivid
ual a
larm
s:
•P
ress
TR
AN
SFE
Ran
d th
en d
ial 1
12.
•D
ial a
larm
num
ber
1, 2
or 3
.•
Pre
ss th
e H
OLD
key.
NO
TE:
Dis
play
key
sets
can
sho
w a
rem
inde
r m
essa
ge. S
ee A
larm
Rem
ind-
er M
essa
ges
unde
r D
ispl
ay F
eatu
res.
AN
SW
ER
ING
TH
E D
OO
R P
HO
NE
Whe
n yo
u ar
e pr
ogra
mm
ed to
rec
eive
cal
ls fr
om a
doo
r ph
one:
•Yo
u w
ill r
ecei
ve th
ree
shor
t rin
gs r
epea
ted.
•Li
ft th
e ha
ndse
t or
pre
ss A
NS
/RLS
key
. Yo
u ar
e co
nnec
ted
to t
he d
oor
phon
e.•
If an
ele
ctric
doo
r lo
ck r
elea
se is
inst
alle
d, d
ial 1
3to
unl
ock
the
door
.
CA
LLIN
G T
HE
DO
OR
PH
ON
E/R
OO
MM
ON
ITO
RYo
u m
ay c
all t
he d
oor
phon
e an
d lis
ten
to w
hat
may
be
happ
enin
g ou
tsid
eor
in a
noth
er r
oom
.
If yo
ur k
eyse
t is
asso
ciat
ed w
ith a
DC
S32
But
ton
Add
-On
Mod
ule,
you
can
rece
ive
Exe
cutiv
e O
HVA
cal
ls.
Exe
cutiv
e O
ff-H
ook
Voic
e A
nnou
nce
allo
ws
you
to e
ngag
e in
con
vers
atio
n on
you
r ke
yset
and
sim
ulta
neou
sly
rece
ive
and
repl
y ha
ndsf
ree
to a
n O
HVA
thro
ugh
your
DC
S32
But
ton
Add
-On
Mod
-ul
e (A
OM
). U
se c
autio
n be
caus
e th
e co
nver
satio
n th
roug
h th
e A
OM
may
poss
ibly
be
hear
d by
the
cal
ler
on t
he k
eyse
t. W
hen
you
rece
ive
an e
xecu
-tiv
e O
HVA
thro
ugh
your
AO
M:
•R
eply
by
spea
king
in th
e di
rect
ion
of th
e m
icro
phon
e in
the
AO
M u
nit.
•A
djus
t the
vol
ume
with
the
VO
LUM
Eke
ys o
n th
e A
OM
uni
t.•
Pre
ss th
e S
PK
key
on th
e A
OM
to d
isco
nnec
t the
ann
ounc
ing
part
y.
NO
TE:
If th
e M
UTE
key
on t
he A
OM
is li
t, yo
u m
ust
pres
s th
e A
OM
’s S
PK
key
to a
nsw
er th
e O
HVA
cal
l.
OH
VA
BLO
CK
Your
key
set c
an b
e pr
ogra
mm
ed w
ith a
n O
HVA
Blo
ck (
BLO
CK
) ke
y. P
ress
-in
g th
is k
ey w
ill p
reve
nt a
nyon
e fro
m m
akin
g an
OH
VA to
you
unt
il yo
u pr
ess
the
butto
n ag
ain
and
canc
el th
e bl
ocki
ng.
OH
VA
RE
JEC
TYo
ur k
eyse
t can
be
prog
ram
med
with
an
OH
VA R
ejec
t (R
EJE
CT)
key
. Pre
ss-
ing
this
key
whi
le r
ecei
ving
an
OH
VA c
all w
ill d
isco
nnec
t the
voi
ce a
nnou
nc-
ing
part
y an
d re
turn
you
to y
our
orig
inal
cal
l.
IN G
RO
UP
/OU
T O
F G
RO
UP
If yo
ur k
eyse
t is
assi
gned
to a
sta
tion
ring
grou
p, y
ou c
an r
emov
e yo
ur k
ey-
set
from
the
gro
up a
nd t
hen
put
it ba
ck in
. W
hile
you
are
out
of
the
grou
p,yo
u ca
n re
ceiv
e ca
lls t
o yo
ur e
xten
sion
num
ber
but
not
calls
to
the
grou
pnu
mbe
r. If
you
have
an
IN/O
UT
key:
•P
ress
the
IN/O
UT
key.
It w
ill li
ght r
ed w
hen
your
key
set i
s in
the
grou
p.•
Pre
ss t
heIN
/OU
Tke
y ag
ain
to e
xit
the
grou
p an
d tu
rn t
he li
ght
off.
Re-
peat
as
nece
ssar
y.
If yo
u do
not
hav
e an
IN
/OU
Tke
y:
•D
ial 5
3pl
us th
e gr
oup
num
ber
plus
0to
exi
t the
gro
up o
r1
to e
nter
the
grou
p. R
epea
t as
nece
ssar
y.
NO
TE:
If th
e H
ot K
eypa
d fe
atur
e ha
s be
en t
urne
d of
f, yo
u m
ust
first
lift
the
hand
set o
r pr
ess
SP
EA
KE
Rke
y.
The
IN/O
UT
key
can
incl
ude
an e
xten
der
to in
dica
te th
e sp
ecifi
c gr
oup
that
this
key
will
affe
ct. T
his
mea
ns th
at if
you
are
in m
ultip
le g
roup
s, y
ou c
an d
e-ci
de fo
r w
hich
gro
ups
you
will
rec
eive
cal
ls.
33
•E
nter
the
acc
ount
cod
e (m
axim
um 1
2 ch
arac
ters
inc
ludi
ng ✱
and
#).
Pre
ss th
e A
CC
Tke
y ag
ain.
You
r co
nver
satio
n w
ill n
ot b
e in
terr
upte
d.
NO
TE:
If yo
u m
ake
an e
rror
bef
ore
you
com
plet
e th
e ac
coun
t co
de,
pres
sth
e A
CC
Tke
y tw
ice
and
redi
al th
e co
rrec
t cod
e. O
nly
the
last
acc
ount
cod
edi
aled
will
be
prin
ted.
LOC
KIN
G Y
OU
R K
EY
SE
TYo
u ca
n lo
ck y
our
keys
et t
o pr
even
t ot
her
peop
le fr
om m
akin
g or
rec
eivi
ngca
lls w
ith it
whi
le y
ou a
re a
way
. You
can
unl
ock
it w
hen
you
retu
rn.
•W
hile
on-
hook
, pre
ss T
RA
NS
FER
and
then
dia
l 100
.•
Dia
l you
r fo
ur d
igit
stat
ion
pass
code
.•
Dia
l 1to
lock
or
0to
unl
ock.
•P
ress
TR
AN
SFE
Rto
sto
re y
our
sele
ctio
n.
OFF
-HO
OK
VO
ICE
AN
NO
UN
CE
Key
sets
may
rec
eive
a v
oice
ann
ounc
emen
t whi
le o
n an
othe
r ca
ll. T
he c
all-
ing
stat
ion
mus
t ha
ve a
n O
HV
Ake
y. W
hen
you
are
in D
ND
, yo
u ca
nnot
rece
ive
OH
VA c
alls
. Th
e O
HVA
fea
ture
will
wor
k w
ith i
nter
com
and
tra
ns-
ferr
ed c
alls
.
To m
ake
an o
ff-ho
ok v
oice
ann
ounc
emen
t:
•D
ial t
he e
xten
sion
num
ber
or p
ress
the
DS
Ske
y.•
Whe
n yo
u re
ceiv
e a
busy
sig
nal,
pres
s th
e O
HV
Ake
y.•
Afte
r th
e at
tent
ion
tone
, beg
in s
peak
ing.
•Fi
nish
the
call
by r
epla
cing
the
hand
set o
r pr
essi
ng th
e A
NS
/RLS
key.
NO
TES
:1.
Whe
n yo
u ar
e vo
ice
anno
unci
ng to
a s
tatio
n cl
ose
to y
ou, u
se th
e ha
nd-
set t
o av
oid
an e
cho
effe
ct.
2.Yo
u ca
nnot
off-
hook
voi
ce a
nnou
nce
to s
ingl
e lin
e te
leph
ones
.
Whe
n yo
u re
ceiv
e an
off-
hook
voi
ce a
nnou
ncem
ent,
if yo
u ar
e us
ing
the
hand
set,
you
will
hea
r th
e an
noun
cem
ent i
n th
e ha
ndse
t rec
eive
r. If
you
are
usin
g th
e sp
eake
rpho
ne,
you
will
hea
r th
e an
noun
cem
ent
over
the
key
set
spea
ker.
In b
oth
case
s, y
ou c
an c
ontin
ue to
spe
ak to
the
orig
inal
par
ty.
•P
ress
the
flash
ing
CA
LLbu
tton
on y
our
keys
et. T
his
will
pla
ce th
e or
igi-
nal p
arty
on
hold
and
allo
w y
ou to
talk
to th
e an
noun
cing
par
ty.
•To
ret
urn
to y
our
first
par
ty, p
ress
the
key
corr
espo
ndin
g to
you
r or
igin
alca
ll. T
his
will
dis
conn
ect t
he O
HVA
cal
l.
32
35
Whi
le th
e ca
ller
is le
avin
g a
mes
sage
or
ringi
ng y
ou m
ay:
•P
ress
[#
] to
imm
edia
tely
put
the
calle
r in
you
r vo
ice
mai
lbox
and
mon
i-to
r it.
•P
ress
[✱] t
o im
med
iate
ly d
isco
nnec
t you
r sta
tion.
The
cal
ler c
ontin
ues
tole
ave
a m
essa
ge n
orm
ally
.•
Pic
k up
the
hand
set a
nd m
onito
r pr
ivat
ely.
•P
ress
AN
S/R
LSto
ans
wer
the
call
(usi
ng th
e ha
ndse
t or
spea
ker)
.
NO
TE: I
f you
do
not w
ant t
o he
ar y
our
pers
onal
gre
etin
g du
ring
this
pro
cess
you
can
sele
ct A
ME
BG
M i
n yo
ur k
eyse
t M
MC
110.
Thi
s w
ill p
lay
back
-gr
ound
mus
ic a
t you
r ke
yset
inst
ead
of y
our
pers
onal
gre
etin
g.
SE
LEC
T R
ING
TO
NE
Eac
h ke
yset
use
r ca
n se
lect
any
one
of e
ight
rin
g fre
quen
cies
:
•W
hile
on-
hook
, pre
ss T
RA
NS
FER
and
then
dia
l 111
.•
Dia
l 1–8
or p
ress
the
UP
and
DO
WN
keys
to h
ear
each
tone
.•
Whe
n yo
u he
ar th
e to
ne th
at y
ou p
refe
r, pr
ess
TRA
NS
FER
to s
ave
it.
CH
AN
GE
YO
UR
PA
SS
CO
DE
From
the
fac
tory
, yo
ur s
tatio
n pa
ssco
de is
123
4. Y
ou c
an c
hang
e yo
ur s
ta-
tion
pass
code
whe
neve
r yo
u de
sire
.
•W
hile
on-
hook
, pre
ss T
RA
NS
FER
and
then
dia
l 101
.•
Dia
l you
r ol
d pa
ssco
de.
•D
ial a
new
pas
scod
e (m
ust b
e fo
ur c
hara
cter
s). Y
ou c
an u
se 0
–9.
•R
edia
l the
new
pas
scod
e to
ver
ify. I
f suc
cess
ful,
you
will
hea
r tw
o be
eps.
Four
bee
ps in
dica
te a
n in
corr
ect c
ode.
Ree
nter
the
code
aga
in.
•P
ress
TR
AN
SFE
Rto
sto
re th
e ne
w p
assc
ode.
SE
T A
NS
WE
R M
OD
EYo
u ca
n re
ceiv
e in
tern
al c
alls
in o
ne o
f thr
ee m
odes
(see
Ans
wer
ing
Inte
rcom
Cal
lsun
der
Inte
rcom
Cal
lsfo
r de
scrip
tions
):
•W
hile
on-
hook
, pre
ss T
RA
NS
FER
and
then
dia
l 103
.•
Dia
l 0fo
r R
ingi
ng, 1
for
Aut
o A
nsw
er o
r 2
for
Voic
e A
nnou
nce.
•P
ress
TR
AN
SFE
Rto
sto
re y
our
sele
ctio
n.
NO
TE: W
hen
your
key
set i
s pr
ogra
mm
ed fo
r Aut
o A
nsw
er a
nd y
ou h
ave
For-
war
d N
o A
nsw
er (
FNA
) tu
rned
on,
you
mus
t an
swer
scr
eene
d tr
ansf
ers
bypr
essi
ng th
e A
NS
/RLS
key
befo
re y
our
FNA
tim
er e
xpire
s or
the
call
will
for-
war
d.
CU
STO
MIZ
ING
YO
UR
KE
YS
ET
AM
E B
GM
This
feat
ure
sele
cts
whe
ther
a s
tatio
n us
ing
Ans
wer
Mac
hine
Em
ulat
ion
will
hear
the
ir pe
rson
al g
reet
ing
or B
GM
whi
le c
alle
rs a
re l
iste
ning
to
the
per-
sona
l gre
etin
g. A
BG
M s
ourc
e m
ust b
e se
lect
ed fo
r thi
s to
wor
k. T
his
feat
ure
only
app
lies
if th
ere
is a
CA
DE
NC
E c
ard
or a
n S
VM
i-4 c
ard
inst
alle
d in
the
syst
em a
nd y
our
keys
et h
as a
pro
gram
med
AM
E k
ey.
•W
hile
the
hand
set i
s on
-hoo
k, p
ress
TR
AN
SFE
Ran
d th
en d
ial 1
10.
•P
ress
01
to tu
rn o
n A
ME
BG
M o
r 00
to tu
rn it
off.
•P
ress
TR
AN
SFE
Rto
sto
re y
our
sele
ctio
n.
AM
E P
AS
SW
OR
DTh
is f
eatu
re a
llow
s pe
ople
usi
ng t
he A
ME
fea
ture
to
enab
le p
assw
ord
pro-
tect
ion.
Thi
s w
ill p
reve
nt u
naut
horiz
ed p
eopl
e fro
m l
iste
ning
to
your
mes
-sa
ges
bein
g le
ft. T
he p
assc
ode
is t
he s
ame
as y
our
stat
ion
pass
code
. Th
isfe
atur
e on
ly a
pplie
s if
ther
e is
a C
AD
EN
CE
car
d or
an
SV
Mi-4
car
d in
stal
led
in th
e sy
stem
and
you
r ke
yset
has
a p
rogr
amm
ed A
ME
key
.
•W
ith th
e ha
ndse
t on-
hook
, pre
ss T
RA
NS
FER
and
then
dia
l 110
.•
Dia
l 11
to tu
rn o
n A
ME
PS
WD
or
10to
turn
it o
ff.•
Pre
ss T
RA
NS
FER
to s
tore
you
r se
lect
ion.
AN
SW
ER
MA
CH
INE
EM
ULA
TIO
NIf
you
have
an
Ans
wer
Mac
hine
Em
ulat
ion
key
prog
ram
med
on
your
key
set,
you
can
use
it to
mon
itor
calls
goi
ng t
o yo
ur v
oice
mai
l, an
d op
tiona
llyan
swer
them
. The
ope
ratio
n of
this
feat
ure
is s
imila
r to
scr
eeni
ng a
cal
l on
aho
me
answ
erin
g m
achi
ne.
Your
key
set m
ust b
e se
t to
forw
ard
on n
o an
swer
to v
oice
mai
l. A
fter
ringi
ngyo
ur s
tatio
n th
e ca
ller
will
be
conn
ecte
d to
voi
ce m
ail a
nd h
ear
your
per
son-
al g
reet
ing
befo
re le
avin
g a
mes
sage
. D
urin
g th
is t
ime
you
will
be
mon
itor-
ing
the
conn
ectio
n be
twee
n th
e ca
ller
and
your
voi
ce m
ail b
ox. Y
ou c
an p
ick
up th
e ca
ll at
any
tim
e or
igno
re it
.
To a
ctiv
ate
this
feat
ure
pres
s th
e A
ME
key
. It w
ill li
ght a
nd th
e fe
atur
e is
set
.P
ress
aga
in to
turn
off.
If th
is k
ey is
pre
ssed
whi
le a
sta
tion
is r
ingi
ng (
durin
gfo
rwar
d no
ans
wer
), th
e fe
atur
e w
ill b
e tu
rned
on
for
the
curr
ent c
all o
nly.
34
37
RE
JOIN
ING
A P
AG
ETh
is fe
atur
e al
low
s yo
u to
hea
r th
e re
mai
ning
por
tion
of a
n on
goin
g in
tern
alpa
ge a
fter
you
retu
rn y
our
keys
et to
idle
. To
enab
le th
is fe
atur
e:
•W
ith th
e ha
ndse
t on-
hook
, pre
ss T
RA
NS
FER
and
then
dia
l 110
.•
Dia
l 71
to tu
rn th
is fe
atur
e on
or
70to
turn
it o
ff.•
Pre
ss T
RA
NS
FER
to s
tore
you
r se
lect
ion.
RIN
G P
RE
FER
EN
CE
This
feat
ure
auto
mat
ical
ly a
nsw
ers
ringi
ng c
alls
whe
n yo
u lif
t the
han
dset
or
pres
s th
e A
NS
/RLS
key.
Thi
s m
etho
d w
ill a
lway
s an
swer
cal
ls in
the
ord
erth
ey a
rriv
ed a
t yo
ur k
eyse
t. W
hen
you
turn
rin
g pr
efer
ence
off,
you
mus
tpr
ess
the
flash
ing
butto
n to
ans
wer
a c
all,
allo
win
g yo
u to
ans
wer
cal
ls in
the
orde
r yo
u ch
oose
.
•W
ith th
e ha
ndse
t on-
hook
, pre
ss T
RA
NS
FER
and
then
dia
l 110
.•
Dia
l 81
to tu
rn r
ing
pref
eren
ce o
n or
80
to tu
rn it
off.
•P
ress
TR
AN
SFE
Rto
sto
re y
our
sele
ctio
n.
AU
TOM
ATI
C H
OLD
Whi
le o
n an
out
side
cal
l, pr
essi
ng a
line
key
, ro
ute
key
or a
fla
shin
g C
ALL
butto
n w
ill a
utom
atic
ally
put
you
r ca
ll on
hol
d an
d co
nnec
t yo
u to
the
nex
tca
ll. T
his
feat
ure
can
be tu
rned
on
or o
ff at
you
r ke
yset
.
•W
ith th
e ha
ndse
t on-
hook
, pre
ss T
RA
NS
FER
and
then
dia
l 110
.•
Dia
l 21
to tu
rn A
utom
atic
Hol
d on
or
20to
turn
it o
ff.•
Pre
ss T
RA
NS
FER
to s
tore
you
r se
lect
ion.
NO
TE: I
nter
com
cal
ls c
an b
e au
tom
atic
ally
put
on
hold
by
pres
sing
TR
AN
S-
FER
.
HE
AD
SE
T O
PE
RA
TIO
NK
eyse
t us
ers
can
switc
h be
twee
n he
adse
t m
ode
and
hand
set
mod
e. W
hen
usin
g he
adse
t mod
e, p
ress
the
AN
S/R
LSke
y to
ans
wer
and
rel
ease
cal
ls.
•W
ith th
e ha
ndse
t on-
hook
, pre
ss T
RA
NS
FER
and
then
dia
l 110
.•
Dia
l 41
to u
se th
e he
adse
t or
40to
use
the
hand
set.
•P
ress
TR
AN
SFE
Rto
sto
re y
our
sele
ctio
n.
Your
key
set m
ay b
e eq
uipp
ed w
ith a
Hea
dset
mod
e ke
y. If
it is
so
equi
pped
pres
sing
this
key
whi
le th
e lig
ht is
out
will
cau
se th
e ke
yset
to e
nter
hea
dset
mod
e an
d th
e lig
ht w
ill il
lum
inat
e to
indi
cate
this
. Pre
ssin
g th
e ke
y w
hile
the
light
is li
t w
ill c
ause
the
key
set
to r
etur
n to
han
dset
mod
e an
d th
e lig
ht w
illgo
out
.
HO
T K
EY
PA
DO
n yo
ur p
hone
sys
tem
you
r ke
yset
’s k
eypa
d ca
n be
mad
e “l
ive”
or
“hot
” so
that
it is
not
nec
essa
ry to
lift
the
hand
set o
r pr
ess
the
SP
EA
KE
Rke
y be
fore
you
begi
n di
alin
g. C
alls
can
be
mad
e an
d fe
atur
es a
ctiv
ated
by
sim
ply
dial
-in
g th
e C
.O. l
ine
num
ber,
trun
k gr
oup
acce
ss c
ode,
inte
rcom
num
ber
or fe
a-tu
re a
cces
s co
de. T
o ac
tivat
e th
is fe
atur
e:
•W
ith th
e ha
ndse
t on-
hook
, pre
ss T
RA
NS
FER
and
then
dia
l 110
.•
Dia
l 51
to tu
rn th
e H
ot K
eypa
d on
or
50to
turn
it o
ff.•
Pre
ss T
RA
NS
FER
to s
tore
you
r se
lect
ion.
KE
Y C
ON
FIR
MA
TIO
N T
ON
EYo
u ca
n he
ar a
sho
rt b
eep
(con
firm
atio
n to
ne)
each
tim
e yo
u pr
ess
a bu
tton
on th
e di
al p
ad. T
his
tone
can
be
turn
ed o
n or
off.
•W
hile
on-
hook
, pre
ss T
RA
NS
FER
and
then
dia
l 110
.•
Dia
l 60
to tu
rn to
nes
off o
r 61
to tu
rn to
nes
on.
•P
ress
TR
AN
SFE
Rto
sto
re y
our
sele
ctio
n.
36
DIA
L B
Y D
IRE
CTO
RY
Eac
h st
atio
n or
spe
ed d
ial n
umbe
r ca
n ha
ve a
n as
soci
ated
dire
ctor
y na
me.
A s
tatio
n or
spe
ed d
ial n
umbe
r ca
n be
sel
ecte
d by
scr
ollin
g al
phab
etic
ally
thro
ugh
a di
rect
ory
nam
e lis
t. Th
is o
n-lin
e “p
hone
boo
k” a
llow
s th
e us
er t
olo
ok u
p an
d di
al a
ny s
tatio
n or
spe
ed d
ial n
umbe
r in
sec
onds
.
•P
ress
the
DIR
key
(DIR
EC
TOR
Y).
•S
elec
t th
e di
rect
ory
you
wis
h to
use
: P
ER
S(p
erso
nal s
peed
dia
l num
-be
rs),
SY
S(s
yste
m s
peed
dia
l num
bers
) or
STN
(sta
tion
nam
es).
•D
ial t
he k
ey o
n th
e ke
ypad
that
cor
resp
onds
to th
e fir
st le
tter o
f the
nam
eyo
u w
ish
to s
earc
h fo
r.•
Use
the
UP
and
DO
WN
arro
ws
to s
crol
l thr
ough
the
nam
es.
•P
ress
the
DIA
Lso
ft ke
y to
dia
l the
num
ber.
NO
TE:
A D
IRke
y ca
n ha
ve a
n ex
tend
er t
o ta
ke y
ou d
irect
ly t
o on
e of
the
abov
e lis
ts.
CA
LL P
RO
GR
ES
S D
ISP
LAY
S
Dur
ing
ever
yday
cal
l han
dlin
g, y
our
keys
et d
ispl
ay w
ill p
rovi
de in
form
atio
nth
at is
hel
pful
and
in s
ome
case
s in
valu
able
. Dis
play
s lik
e [C
ALL
FR
OM
203
],[T
RA
NS
FER
TO
202
], [
701:
RIN
GIN
G],
[TR
AN
SFE
R F
M 2
03],
[70
8 bu
sy],
[Cam
p on
to 2
04],
[R
ecal
l fro
m 2
04],
[C
all f
or 5
01],
[m
essa
ge fr
m 2
04]
and
[FW
D A
LL t
o 20
4] k
eep
you
info
rmed
of w
hat
is h
appe
ning
and
whe
re y
ouar
e. I
n so
me
cond
ition
s yo
u ar
e pr
ompt
ed t
o ta
ke a
n ac
tion
and
in o
ther
case
s yo
u re
ceiv
e di
rect
ory
info
rmat
ion.
DIS
PLA
Y N
UM
BE
R D
IALE
DD
ispl
ay k
eyse
ts b
egin
sho
win
g di
gits
as
they
are
dia
led.
The
y w
ill s
tay
in th
edi
spla
y un
til t
he c
all
dura
tion
timer
com
es o
n au
tom
atic
ally
or
the
TIM
ER
butto
n is
pre
ssed
. If t
he c
all d
urat
ion
timer
is n
ot u
sed,
the
num
ber d
iale
d w
illbe
dis
play
ed u
ntil
the
call
is r
elea
sed,
tran
sfer
red
or p
ut o
n ho
ld.
CA
LL D
UR
ATI
ON
TIM
ER
The
syst
em c
an b
e se
t to
aut
omat
ical
ly t
ime
outs
ide
calls
. A
few
sec
onds
afte
r yo
u di
al a
tel
epho
ne n
umbe
r, th
e tim
er a
ppea
rs i
n th
e di
spla
y. I
tap
pear
s im
med
iate
ly fo
r in
com
ing
calls
. The
cal
l tim
er c
ontin
ues
for
the
du-
ratio
n of
the
call.
Cal
l dur
atio
n tim
es a
re d
ispl
ayed
in m
inut
es a
nd s
econ
ds.
If a
call
last
s lo
nger
than
60
min
utes
, the
tim
er r
esta
rts.
You
can
pres
s th
e TI
ME
Rke
y to
man
ually
beg
in ti
min
g a
call.
Pre
ss it
aga
into
sto
p tim
ing.
If y
ou p
ress
it w
hile
the
aut
omat
ic t
imer
is o
n, t
he c
all d
ura-
tion
time
is r
esta
rted
.
3938
DIS
PLA
Y F
EA
TUR
ES
INTE
RA
CTI
VE
DIS
PLA
Y K
EY
STh
e th
ree
keys
bel
ow t
he d
ispl
ay a
re s
ubst
itute
s fo
r de
dica
ted
feat
ure
keys
and
acce
ss c
odes
. Pre
ssin
g on
e of
thes
e ke
ys h
as th
e sa
me
effe
ct a
s pr
ess-
ing
a pr
ogra
mm
able
key
. The
se k
eys
are
calle
d so
ft ke
ys a
s th
eir
func
tions
are
not f
ixed
. The
y ch
ange
to p
rese
nt y
ou w
ith th
e be
st o
ptio
ns fo
r th
at c
all
cond
ition
. The
use
of s
oft k
eys
allo
ws
the
prog
ram
mab
le k
eys
to b
e us
ed fo
rm
ore
DS
San
d sp
eed
dial
key
s.
The
SC
RO
LLke
y is
use
d to
dis
play
opt
ions
ava
ilabl
e to
the
user
at a
par
tic-
ular
tim
e or
dur
ing
a sp
ecifi
c pr
oced
ure.
Pre
ss th
is k
ey o
nce
whi
le in
the
idle
stat
e to
vie
w th
e th
ree
mai
n ca
tego
ries
avai
labl
e.
201:
STN
NA
ME
CA
LL
OTH
ER
A
NS
AN
SW
ER
:G
uide
s yo
u th
roug
h th
e op
tions
to a
nsw
er c
alls
.O
THE
R:G
uide
s yo
u th
roug
h fe
atur
es o
ther
than
mak
ing
or a
nsw
erin
g ca
lls.
CA
LL:
Gui
des
you
thro
ugh
the
optio
ns to
mak
e a
call.
Sel
ect o
ne o
f the
mai
n ca
tego
ries:
CA
LL, O
THE
R o
r AN
S (A
NS
WE
R).
Pre
ssth
e S
CR
OLL
key
to d
ispl
ay a
dditi
onal
opt
ions
ava
ilabl
e un
der
each
of
the
thre
e m
ain
cate
gorie
s. T
he s
ymbo
l ➡di
spla
yed
as th
e la
st c
hara
cter
on
the
low
er li
ne o
f the
dis
play
indi
cate
s th
at th
ere
are
addi
tiona
l opt
ions
. Pre
ss th
eS
CR
OLL
key
to d
ispl
ay th
ese
addi
tiona
l opt
ions
.
Use
r in
stru
ctio
ns w
ill b
e di
spla
yed
in lo
wer
cas
e le
tters
. Opt
ions
ass
igne
d to
soft
keys
will
be
in u
pper
cas
e le
tters
.
DIR
EC
TOR
Y I
NFO
RM
ATI
ON
An
11 c
hara
cter
dire
ctor
y na
me
can
be a
ssig
ned
to e
ach
exte
nsio
n nu
mbe
r.D
ispl
ay k
eyse
t use
rs c
an v
iew
the
nam
e of
the
calle
d or
cal
ling
stat
ion
befo
rean
swer
ing.
Eac
h ou
tsid
e lin
e ca
n ha
ve a
n 11
cha
ract
er d
irect
ory
nam
e. In
com
ing
calls
can
be e
asily
iden
tifie
d an
d an
swer
ed w
ith d
iffer
ent g
reet
ings
.
Out
side
and
inte
rnal
cal
ls r
ingi
ng to
a s
tatio
n gr
oup
will
dis
play
[C
ALL
FO
Rxx
x] w
here
xxx
is th
e st
atio
n gr
oup
num
ber.
This
allo
ws
you
to a
nsw
er c
alls
dire
cted
to y
ou d
iffer
ently
than
cal
ls d
irect
ed to
you
r gr
oup.
CO
UN
T 1
2 3
45
DIA
L 0
<>
.
)0
DIA
L 1
spac
e ?
, !
1
DIA
L 2
A
B
C
@2
DIA
L 3
D
E
F #
3
DIA
L 4
G
H
I $
4
DIA
L 5
J K
L
%5
DIA
L 6
M
N
O
^6
DIA
L 7
P
Q
R
S7
DIA
L 8
T U
V
✱
8
DIA
L 9
W
X
Y
Z9
DIA
L ✱
: =
[
]✱
NO
TES
:1.
Whe
n th
e ch
arac
ter
you
wan
t app
ears
on
the
sam
e di
al p
ad k
ey a
s th
epr
evio
us c
hara
cter
, pre
ss U
P to
mov
e th
e cu
rsor
one
spa
ce to
the
right
.2.
Oth
er s
ymbo
ls a
re a
vaila
ble
for
DIA
L #
.
To c
ance
l an
indi
vidu
al a
larm
and
rem
inde
r m
essa
ge:
•P
ress
TR
AN
SFE
Ran
d th
en d
ial 1
12.
•D
ial a
larm
num
ber
1, 2
or 3
.•
Pre
ss th
e H
OLD
key.
•P
ress
the
TRA
NS
FER
key.
PE
RS
ON
AL
SP
EE
D D
IAL
NA
ME
SE
ach
pers
onal
spe
ed d
ial n
umbe
r ca
n ha
ve a
n 11
cha
ract
er n
ame
assi
gned
to it
. Thi
s na
me
is u
sed
to s
elec
t the
spe
ed d
ial b
in w
hen
you
are
dial
ing
bydi
rect
ory.
•P
ress
TR
AN
SFE
Ran
d th
en d
ial 1
06.
•D
ial t
he s
peed
dia
l bin
num
ber
00–4
9.•
Writ
e yo
ur m
essa
ge u
sing
the
pro
cedu
re d
escr
ibed
in A
larm
Rem
inde
rM
essa
ges.
•P
ress
the
TRA
NS
FER
key
to s
tore
the
spee
d di
al n
ame.
•R
epea
t for
eac
h sp
eed
dial
bin
if n
eces
sary
.
41
AU
TO T
IME
RD
ispl
ay k
eyse
t us
ers
may
hav
e th
e tim
er a
utom
atic
ally
sta
rt w
hen
they
answ
er in
com
ing
calls
or
afte
r a
shor
t del
ay o
n an
out
goin
g ca
ll.
•W
ith th
e ha
ndse
t on-
hook
, pre
ss T
RS
Fan
d th
en d
ial 1
10.
•D
ial 3
1to
turn
the
auto
tim
er o
n or
30
to tu
rn it
off.
•P
ress
TR
SF
to s
tore
you
r se
lect
ion.
TIM
ER
FU
NC
TIO
ND
ispl
ay k
eyse
t use
rs m
ay u
se th
is fe
atur
e as
a s
impl
e st
opw
atch
.
•W
hen
the
keys
et is
idle
, pre
ss th
e TI
ME
Rbu
tton
to s
tart
tim
ing.
•P
ress
the
TIM
ER
butto
n ag
ain
to s
top
timin
g.•
Rea
d th
e el
apse
d tim
e in
the
disp
lay.
•Li
ft th
e ha
ndse
t and
rep
lace
it. T
he d
ispl
ay w
ill r
etur
n to
dat
e an
d tim
e.
VIE
WIN
G M
ES
SA
GE
IN
DIC
ATI
ON
SYo
u ca
n vi
ew a
ll of
you
r m
essa
ge in
dica
tions
bef
ore
you
retu
rn th
em:
•W
ith th
e ha
ndse
t on-
hook
, pre
ss th
e M
SG
key
with
the
red
flash
ing
light
.•
The
first
sta
tion
that
left
a m
essa
ge in
dica
tion
will
be
disp
laye
d.•
Pre
ss t
he U
Pan
d D
OW
Nar
row
s to
scr
oll t
hrou
gh t
he s
tatio
ns t
hat
left
mes
sage
indi
catio
ns. U
se th
e so
ft ke
ys to
rep
ly, c
lear
or
adva
nce
to th
ene
xt m
essa
ge.
•P
ress
the
AN
S/R
LSke
y to
ret
urn
your
key
set t
o th
e id
le c
ondi
tion.
ALA
RM
RE
MIN
DE
R M
ES
SA
GE
SW
hen
you
use
the
alar
m/a
ppoi
ntm
ent
rem
inde
r fe
atur
e, y
ou
crea
te a
16
char
acte
r re
min
der
mes
sage
. W
hen
the
alar
m r
ings
, yo
ur m
essa
ge w
ill a
p-pe
ar in
stea
d of
[A
LAR
M R
EM
IND
ER
]. T
o pr
ogra
m r
emin
der
mes
sage
s:
•P
ress
TR
AN
SFE
R a
nd th
en d
ial 1
16.
•D
ial t
he a
larm
num
ber
1, 2
or 3
.•
Dia
l th
e tim
e yo
u w
ant
the
alar
m t
o go
off.
Ent
er t
he t
ime
as H
HM
M(h
ours
and
min
utes
) us
ing
the
24 h
our
cloc
k.•
Dia
l 0(N
OT
SE
T), 1
(TO
DAY
) or
2(D
AIL
Y)
to s
elec
t the
ala
rm ty
pe.
•W
rite
your
mes
sage
usi
ng th
e di
al p
ad k
eys.
Eac
h pr
ess
of a
key
sel
ects
a ch
arac
ter.
Pre
ssin
g th
e ne
xt k
ey m
oves
the
curs
or to
the
next
pos
ition
.Fo
r ex
ampl
e, if
you
r m
essa
ge is
“TA
KE
ME
DIC
ATI
ON
,” p
ress
8 o
nce
toge
t the
lette
r “T
.” P
ress
2 o
nce
to g
et “A
.” P
ress
5 tw
ice
to g
et “
K.”
Con
-tin
ue s
elec
ting
char
acte
rs f
rom
the
fol
low
ing
tabl
e to
com
plet
e yo
urm
essa
ge.
•P
ress
the
TRA
NS
FER
key
to s
tore
the
alar
m a
nd r
emin
der
mes
sage
.•
Rep
eat f
or e
ach
alar
m if
nee
ded.
40
WH
AT
IS C
ALL
ER
ID
?C
alle
r ID
is th
e na
me
give
n to
the
tele
phon
e co
mpa
ny-p
rovi
ded
feat
ure
that
deliv
ers
the
tele
phon
e nu
mbe
r an
d so
met
imes
the
nam
e of
the
pers
on c
all-
ing
your
pho
ne. T
here
are
two
type
s of
Cal
ler I
D; t
he fi
rst d
eliv
ers
the
calli
ngpa
rty’
s te
leph
one
num
ber
only
and
the
sec
ond
(som
etim
es r
efer
red
to a
s“D
elux
e” C
alle
r ID
) de
liver
s bo
th t
he c
allin
g pa
rty’
s te
leph
one
num
ber
and
nam
e as
list
ed in
the
tele
phon
e di
rect
ory.
The
phon
e sy
stem
can
han
dle
both
type
s of
Cal
ler
ID; i
n fa
ct, i
n th
e ca
se o
fnu
mbe
r on
ly d
eliv
ery,
the
sys
tem
can
be
prog
ram
med
to
inse
rt a
nam
e fo
ra
spec
ific
tele
phon
e nu
mbe
r (u
p to
a m
axim
um o
f 250
num
bers
).
How
ever
, eve
n th
ough
you
are
pay
ing
to re
ceiv
e C
alle
r ID
info
rmat
ion,
ther
ear
e so
me
circ
umst
ance
s th
at m
ean
you
will
not
rece
ive
this
info
rmat
ion.
The
six
mos
t co
mm
on r
easo
ns a
re li
sted
bel
ow a
long
with
the
dis
play
info
rma-
tion
that
the
syst
em w
ill p
rovi
de.
PR
IVA
TETh
e ca
ller
does
not
wis
h hi
s/he
r na
me
or n
umbe
r to
be
reve
aled
to y
ou. T
his
type
of c
all c
an b
e st
oppe
d at
the
tele
phon
e co
mpa
ny b
y di
alin
g an
acc
ess
code
on
your
outs
ide
lines
. Th
is w
ill r
edire
ct t
hese
PR
IVA
TE c
alls
to
an a
nnou
ncem
ent t
hat s
tate
s th
at y
ou d
o no
t wis
h to
re-
ceiv
e ca
lls th
at h
ave
had
Cal
ler I
D b
lock
ed. T
he c
ode
tobl
ock
thes
e ca
lls c
an u
sual
ly b
e fo
und
in th
e fro
nt s
ec-
tion
of th
e te
leph
one
dire
ctor
y.
OU
T O
F A
RE
ATh
e ca
ller
is c
allin
g fro
m a
n ar
ea t
hat
cann
ot p
rovi
deC
alle
r ID
info
rmat
ion
(for
exa
mpl
e, in
tern
atio
nal c
alls
) or
he/s
he is
cal
ling
from
a t
ype
of c
ircui
t th
at c
anno
t pr
o-vi
de C
alle
r ID
info
rmat
ion,
for
exam
ple,
som
e ou
tbou
ndW
ATS
line
s.
PAY
PH
ON
ETh
e ca
ller
is c
allin
g fro
m a
coi
n-op
erat
ed t
elep
hone
.Th
e te
leph
one
com
pany
will
sen
d th
is i
nfor
mat
ion
asth
ere
are
no d
irect
ory
listin
gs fo
r pay
pho
nes.
The
num
-be
r w
ill b
e de
liver
ed a
s us
ual.
INVA
LID
CID
INFO
This
is a
mes
sage
tha
t w
ill b
e di
spla
yed
whe
n co
rrup
t-ed
CID
info
rmat
ion
is r
ecei
ved
from
the
Cen
tral
Offi
ce.
NO
CID
RE
CE
IVE
DTh
is is
a m
essa
ge t
hat
will
be
disp
laye
d w
hen
the
CID
info
rmat
ion
is
not
rece
ived
fr
om
th
e te
lep
hone
co
mpa
ny.
43
STA
TIO
N N
AM
ES
You
can
assi
gn a
n 11
cha
ract
er n
ame
to y
our
keys
et. T
his
allo
ws
othe
r di
s-pl
ay k
eyse
t use
rs to
cal
l you
usi
ng th
e di
rect
ory
dial
feat
ure.
To p
rogr
am a
sta
tion
nam
e:
•P
ress
TR
AN
SFE
Ran
d th
en d
ial 1
04.
•E
nter
the
11 c
hara
cter
nam
e us
ing
the
proc
edur
e de
scrib
ed in
Ala
rm R
e-m
inde
r M
essa
ges.
•P
ress
TR
AN
SFE
Rto
sto
re th
e na
me.
MA
NA
GIN
G K
EY
AS
SIG
NM
EN
TSYo
u ca
n vi
ew y
our
key
assi
gnm
ents
and
add
ext
ende
rs to
som
e of
you
r pr
o-gr
amm
able
key
s fo
r ea
sy o
ne to
uch
oper
atio
n of
freq
uent
ly u
sed
feat
ures
.
An
exte
nder
is a
num
ber
that
mak
es a
n ot
herw
ise
gene
ral k
ey v
ery
spec
ific.
Add
ing
the
digi
t “4
” to
a P
AG
Eke
y de
fines
thi
s ke
y fo
r pa
ging
zon
e fo
ur.
Add
ing
“225
” to
a d
iffer
ent
pick
up k
ey w
ill d
efin
e th
is k
ey a
s pi
ckup
for
ex-
tens
ion
225
only
. The
key
mus
t alre
ady
be a
ssig
ned
by th
e te
chni
cian
.
•W
hile
on-
hook
, pre
ss T
RA
NS
FER
and
then
dia
l 107
.•
Use
the
VO
LUM
Eke
ys to
scr
oll t
hrou
gh a
ll of
you
r pr
ogra
mm
able
key
sO
RP
ress
the
prog
ram
mab
le k
ey to
whi
ch y
ou w
ant t
o ad
d th
e ex
tend
er.
•W
hen
you
reac
h a
key
liste
d be
low
, dia
l the
cor
resp
ondi
ng e
xten
der.
•P
ress
TR
AN
SFE
Rto
sto
re a
nd e
xit p
rogr
amm
ing.
KE
YD
ES
CR
IPTI
ON
EX
TEN
DE
R
BO
SS
. . .
. . .
.Bos
s/S
ecre
tary
. . .
. . .
1–4
DP
. . .
. . .
. . .
.Dire
ct P
icku
p .
. . .
. . .E
xten
sion
or
stat
ion
grou
p nu
mbe
rD
S .
. . .
. . .
. . .D
irect
Sta
tion
. . .
. . .
. .A
ny e
xten
sion
num
ber
FWR
D .
. . .
. . .C
all F
orw
ardi
ng
. . .
. .0
–6G
PIK
. . .
. . .
. .G
roup
Pic
k-U
p .
. . .
. .01
–20
IG .
. . .
. . .
. . .I
n/O
ut o
f Gro
up .
. . .
. .A
ny g
roup
you
are
par
t of 5
00–5
29M
MP
G .
. . .
. .M
eet M
e P
age
. . .
. . .
0–9,
✱P
SM
G .
. . .
. . .P
rogr
amm
ed M
essa
ge 0
1–20
PA
GE
. . .
. . .
.Pag
e .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.0–9
, ✱S
G .
. . .
. . .
. . .S
tatio
n G
roup
. . .
. . .
.500
–529
SP
D .
. . .
. . .
.Spe
ed D
ialin
g .
. . .
. . .0
0–49
, 500
–999
DIR
. . .
. . .
. . .
Dire
ctor
y .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.PE
RS
(1)
, SY
S (
2) o
r S
TN (
3)V
T .
. . .
. . .
. . .V
oice
Mai
l Tra
nsfe
r .
. .Vo
ice
Mai
l Gro
up (
501–
529)
NO
TE:
Con
firm
tha
t th
e cu
rsor
is p
lace
d co
rrec
tly b
efor
e yo
u en
ter
the
ex-
tend
er.
42
RE
DIA
LIN
G A
SA
VE
D C
ID N
UM
BE
RTo
red
ial a
num
ber
that
has
bee
n sa
ved,
pre
ss th
e S
AV
Eke
y or
dia
l 17.
NO
TES
:1.
Your
tel
epho
ne s
yste
m m
ust
have
LC
R c
orre
ctly
pro
gram
med
to
redi
alth
e sa
ved
num
ber.
2.If
the
Hot
Key
pad
feat
ure
has
been
turn
ed o
ff, y
ou m
ust f
irst l
ift th
e ha
nd-
set o
r pr
ess
the
SP
EA
KE
Rke
y be
fore
you
beg
in d
ialin
g.
STO
RIN
G A
CID
NU
MB
ER
At a
ny ti
me
durin
g an
inco
min
g ca
ll th
at p
rovi
des
CID
info
rmat
ion,
you
may
save
the
CID
num
ber
as a
spe
ed d
ial n
umbe
r in
you
r pe
rson
al s
peed
dia
llis
t. To
sto
re a
Cal
ler
ID n
umbe
r in
a p
erso
nal s
peed
dia
l bin
:
•P
ress
the
STO
RE
key.
The
sys
tem
dis
play
s th
e sp
eed
dial
bin
in w
hich
the
num
ber
was
sto
red
OR
•P
ress
the
CID
key
and
then
pre
ss th
e S
CR
OLL
key.
•P
ress
the
STO
RE
soft
key.
•Th
e sy
stem
dis
play
s th
e sp
eed
dial
bin
in w
hich
the
num
ber w
as s
tore
d.
NO
TE: Y
our
tele
phon
e sy
stem
mus
t hav
e LC
R c
orre
ctly
pro
gram
med
to r
e-di
al th
e sa
ved
num
ber.
If LC
R is
not
bei
ng u
sed
on y
our s
yste
m, y
ou w
ill n
otbe
allo
wed
to S
TOR
E C
ID n
umbe
rs.
INQ
UIR
E C
ID P
AR
K/H
OLD
INFO
If yo
u ar
e in
form
ed th
at a
n in
com
ing
call
is o
n ho
ld o
r ha
s be
en p
arke
d fo
ryo
u, y
ou m
ay v
iew
the
Cal
ler I
D in
form
atio
n be
fore
you
retr
ieve
the
call.
Thi
sm
ay in
fluen
ce h
ow y
ou c
hoos
e to
han
dle
the
call.
From
an
idle
key
set:
•P
ress
the
INQ
UIR
Eke
y O
RP
ress
the
CID
key
and
then
the
INQ
UIR
Eso
ft ke
y.•
Dia
l the
trun
k nu
mbe
r.•
You
may
now
ans
wer
the
call
by p
ress
ing
the
AN
S k
ey O
RYo
u m
ay u
se N
ND
to v
iew
mor
e in
form
atio
n ab
out t
his
call
OR
You
can
retu
rn to
the
idle
con
ditio
n by
pre
ssin
g IG
NO
RE
.
If yo
u ar
e on
a c
all:
•P
ress
the
INQ
UIR
Eke
y. Y
our
exis
ting
call
will
go
on h
old
OR
Pre
ss th
e C
IDke
y an
d th
en th
e IN
QU
IRE
soft
key
to p
lace
the
first
cal
lon
hol
d.•
Dia
l the
trun
k nu
mbe
r.
45
NO
CID
DS
PC
alle
r ID
D
igita
l S
igna
l P
roce
ssor
s (C
IDD
SP
’s)
are
reso
urce
s in
the
DC
S t
o re
ceiv
e an
d tr
ansl
ate
the
CID
da
ta. I
f the
re a
re n
o C
IDD
SP
s av
aila
ble
at th
e tim
e a
call
com
es in
, thi
s is
the
mes
sage
you
will
see
on
your
dis
-pl
ay.
In t
he u
nlik
ely
even
t th
at [
NO
CID
DS
P]
cons
is-
tent
ly a
ppea
rs c
onsu
lt w
ith y
our
serv
ice
com
pany
.
NO
TE:
The
Cal
ler
ID f
eatu
res
requ
ire o
ptio
nal
softw
are
and/
or h
ardw
are.
Ple
ase
see
your
ser
vice
and
inst
alla
tion
com
pany
for
deta
ils.
SE
LEC
TIN
G Y
OU
R C
ALL
ER
ID
D
ISP
LAY
You
can
deci
de if
you
wan
t to
see
the
CID
nam
e or
CID
num
ber
in t
he d
is-
play
. R
egar
dles
s of
whi
ch o
ne is
sel
ecte
d, y
ou c
an p
ress
the
NN
Dke
y to
view
the
othe
r pie
ces
of C
ID in
form
atio
n. T
o se
lect
the
type
of C
alle
r ID
info
r-m
atio
n yo
u w
ish
to v
iew
firs
t:
•W
ith th
e ha
ndse
t on-
hook
, pre
ss T
RA
NS
FER
and
then
dia
l 119
.•
Dia
l 0if
you
do n
ot w
ish
to v
iew
CID
info
rmat
ion,
1to
vie
w th
e N
UM
BE
Rfir
st o
r 2
to v
iew
the
NA
ME
firs
t.•
Pre
ss T
RA
NS
FER
to e
xit a
nd s
tore
you
r se
lect
ion.
VIE
WIN
G T
HE
NE
XT
CID
CA
LLIn
the
even
t tha
t you
hav
e a
call
wai
ting
or a
cam
ped-
on c
all a
t you
r ke
yset
,yo
u ca
n pr
ess
the
NE
XT
key
to d
ispl
ay th
e C
alle
r ID
info
rmat
ion
asso
ciat
edw
ith th
e ca
ll in
que
ue a
t you
r key
set.
Eith
er th
e C
ID n
ame
or C
ID n
umbe
r will
show
in th
e di
spla
y de
pend
ing
on y
our
Nam
e/N
umbe
r se
lect
ion.
To v
iew
Cal
ler
ID i
nfor
mat
ion
for
calls
tha
t ha
ve b
een
cam
ped-
on t
o yo
urke
yset
, pre
ss th
e N
EX
Tke
y. If
you
r key
set d
oes
not h
ave
a N
EX
Tke
y, p
ress
the
CID
key
and
then
the
NE
XT
soft
key.
SA
VIN
G T
HE
CID
NU
MB
ER
A
t any
tim
e du
ring
an in
com
ing
call
that
pro
vide
s C
ID in
form
atio
n, y
ou m
aypr
ess
the
SA
VE
key
to s
ave
the
CID
num
ber.
If yo
ur k
eyse
t doe
s no
t hav
e a
SA
VE
key,
pre
ss th
e C
IDke
y, th
e S
CR
OLL
key
and
then
the
SA
VE
soft
key.
The
syst
em m
ust b
e us
ing
LCR
to d
ial t
he s
aved
num
ber.
44
47
•Yo
u m
ay n
ow a
nsw
er th
e ca
ll by
pre
ssin
g th
e A
NS
key
OR
You
may
use
NN
Dto
vie
w m
ore
info
rmat
ion
abou
t thi
s ca
ll O
RYo
u ca
n re
turn
to th
e id
le c
ondi
tion
by p
ress
ing
IGN
OR
E.
NO
TES
: 1.
If yo
u ar
e on
an
inte
rcom
cal
l or y
ou h
ave
Aut
omat
ic H
old
turn
ed o
ff, y
oum
ust f
inis
h th
e ex
istin
g ca
ll or
pla
ce it
on
hold
bef
ore
inqu
iring
.2.
If yo
u in
quire
abo
ut a
n ou
tgoi
ng c
all,
you
will
rec
eive
a [
call
no lo
nger
avai
labl
e] d
ispl
ay.
RE
VIE
WIN
G P
AS
T C
ID C
ALL
STh
is fe
atur
e al
low
s yo
u to
rev
iew
CID
info
rmat
ion
for
calls
sen
t to
your
key
-se
t. Th
is li
st c
an c
onta
in 1
0–50
cal
ls in
a f
irst-i
n, f
irst-o
ut b
asis
. Th
e lis
t in
-cl
udes
cal
ls th
at y
ou a
nsw
ered
and
cal
ls th
at r
ang
your
key
set b
ut th
at y
oudi
d no
t an
swer
. W
hen
revi
ewin
g th
is li
st,
you
can
pres
s on
e bu
tton
to d
ial
the
pers
on b
ack.
The
sys
tem
mus
t be
usin
g LC
R to
dia
l the
sto
red
num
ber.
To a
cces
s th
e C
ID in
form
atio
n st
ored
in y
our
RE
VIE
W li
st:
•P
ress
the
RE
VIE
Wke
y O
RP
ress
the
CID
key
and
then
pre
ss th
e R
EV
IEW
soft
key.
•If
you
have
ent
ries
in y
our
revi
ew li
st, t
he o
ldes
t cal
l will
be
show
n fir
st.
•Yo
u ca
n no
w C
LEA
Rth
is e
ntry
OR
Use
NN
Dto
vie
w m
ore
info
rmat
ion
abou
t thi
s ca
ll O
RP
ress
DIA
Lto
cal
l thi
s pe
rson
bac
k O
RP
ress
SC
RO
LLan
d th
en p
ress
STO
RE
to s
ave
this
num
ber i
n a
pers
on-
al s
peed
dia
l bin
.
NO
TES
: 1.
Eac
h ke
yset
def
aults
with
ten
rev
iew
bin
s. P
leas
e se
e yo
ur s
yste
m a
d-m
inis
trat
or to
det
erm
ine
the
num
ber
of b
ins
assi
gned
to y
our
keys
et.
2.Yo
ur s
yste
m m
ust h
ave
LCR
cor
rect
ly p
rogr
amm
ed to
allo
w y
ou to
DIA
Lnu
mbe
rs fr
om th
e re
view
list
or
to S
TOR
Een
trie
s fro
m th
e re
view
list
.
LCR
WIT
H C
LEA
RW
hen
you
are
mak
ing
an o
utsi
de c
all u
sing
LC
R a
nd d
ial a
n in
corr
ect d
igit,
you
can
pres
s th
e C
LEA
Rso
ft ke
y to
ree
nter
the
tele
phon
e nu
mbe
r. Yo
u do
not n
eed
to r
edia
l 9to
rea
cces
s LC
R.
46
64 B
UT
TON
MO
DU
LEW
ITH
KE
YS
ET
The
64 b
utto
n m
odul
e is
use
d w
hen
you
need
mor
e pr
ogra
mm
able
key
sad
ded
to y
our k
eyse
t. Th
e 64
red
LED
’s p
rovi
de v
isua
l ind
icat
ion
of c
alls
and
feat
ures
. Th
e ex
tra
prog
ram
mab
le k
eys
are
used
exa
ctly
lik
e th
e on
es o
nyo
ur k
eyse
t. M
ake
them
DS
S/B
LF k
eys
or f
eatu
re k
eys.
As
a D
SS
/BLF
the
size
of t
he 6
4 bu
tton
mod
ule
allo
ws
for g
reat
er c
all s
tatu
s an
d fa
ster
cal
l pro
-ce
ssin
g. T
he 6
4 bu
tton
mod
ule
does
not
sup
port
exe
cutiv
e of
f-hoo
k vo
ice
anno
unce
(O
HVA
) an
d do
es n
ot h
ave
a m
icro
phon
e. A
max
imum
of t
wo
64bu
tton
mod
ules
can
be
assi
gned
to a
ny k
eyse
t.
48
SV
Mi-
4
This
sec
tion
desc
ribes
how
to s
etup
you
r m
ailb
ox, a
nd h
ow to
use
the
vari-
ous
mai
lbox
ow
ner
feat
ures
. Ple
ase
revi
ew t
his
sect
ion
care
fully
bef
ore
you
use
your
mai
lbox
.
Your
voi
ce m
ail b
ox h
as t
he c
apab
ility
of
stor
ing
priv
ate
mes
sage
s of
fers
anu
mbe
r of
opt
ions
for
send
ing
or r
edire
ctin
g m
essa
ges
and
prov
ides
sev
er-
al w
ays
to n
otify
you
of n
ew m
essa
ges
or c
alls
.
This
sec
tion
can
be u
sed
by m
ailb
ox o
wne
rs f
rom
with
in t
he o
ffice
or
from
tele
phon
es o
utsi
de t
he o
ffice
. Th
e ba
sic
oper
atio
n is
the
sam
e, b
ut t
heac
cess
met
hod
will
be
diffe
rent
. See
the
flow
cha
rt fo
r m
ore
deta
ils.
Not
e th
at s
ome
feat
ures
and
pro
mpt
s de
taile
d he
re m
ay n
ot b
e av
aila
ble
toal
l m
ailb
ox o
wne
rs.
See
you
r sy
stem
adm
inis
trat
or i
f yo
u ha
ve q
uest
ions
abou
t fea
ture
ava
ilabi
lity.
FLO
W C
HA
RT
AC
CE
SS
ING
YO
UR
MA
ILB
OX
Out
sid
e C
alle
rs•
Dia
l the
pho
ne n
umbe
r th
at w
ill b
e an
swer
ed b
y th
e S
VM
i-4.
The
mai
ngr
eetin
g w
ill a
nsw
er.
•A
t th
e m
ain
gree
ting
dial
[#
] pl
us y
our
mai
lbox
num
ber
(mai
lbox
num
-be
rs w
ill u
sual
ly m
atch
you
r ex
tens
ion
num
ber.
•E
nter
you
r pe
rson
al m
ailb
ox p
assw
ord
whe
n pr
ompt
ed (
the
defa
ult
pass
wor
d is
000
0).
Insi
de
Cal
lers
• D
ial t
he S
VM
i-4 A
cces
s N
umbe
r or p
ress
the
key
assi
gned
to ri
ng S
VM
i-4
[VM
MS
G].
•E
nter
you
r pe
rson
al m
ailb
ox p
assw
ord
whe
n pr
ompt
ed (
the
defa
ult
pass
wor
d is
000
0).
MA
ILB
OX
MA
INM
EN
U
1N
ewM
essa
ges
2R
eco
rdan
dS
end
Mes
sag
e
3S
aved
Mes
sag
es
5P
erso
nal
Gre
etin
gs
6M
ailb
ox
Ad
min
istr
atio
n
#P
erso
nal
Ser
vice
s
1an
d3
-W
hile
Lis
ten
ing
toM
essa
ges
111
23
45
67
89
99 000
###
Pla
yM
essa
ges
Pre
viou
sM
essa
ge
Sav
eM
essa
ges
Dis
card
Mes
sage
s
Rep
lyto
Sen
der
Cal
lSen
der
For
war
da
Cop
yR
ewin
d5
Sec
s
Pau
se,R
esum
eF
orw
ard
5S
ecs
Cha
nge
Spe
edC
ance
l
Pla
yO
ptio
nsM
sgIn
form
atio
n
Ski
pM
essa
ges
Sca
nM
essa
ges
✱
2-
Wh
ileR
eco
rdin
gM
essa
ges
1 2 3 6 7 77 8 9 99 0 #
Rev
iew
Rec
ordi
ng
Sto
pR
ecor
ding
,App
end
Dis
card
,Rer
ecor
d
SE
ND
,The
nC
opy
Rew
ind
5S
ecs
Cha
nge
Vol
ume
Pau
se,R
esum
e
For
war
d5
Sec
s
Cha
nge
Spe
ed
Can
cel
Pla
yO
ptio
ns
SE
ND
,NO
Cop
ies
✱
6-
Mai
lbo
xA
dm
in
1 2 3 4
Mes
sage
Ale
rt
Pag
erN
otifi
catio
n
Del
eted
Mes
sage
s
Und
eliv
ered
Mes
sage
s
5-
Per
son
alG
reet
ing
s
Edi
tMai
lbox
Gre
etin
g
#7-
Per
son
alA
dm
in
1 2
Cha
nge
Pas
swor
d
Rec
ord
Nam
e
49
At t
his
poin
t the
insi
de a
nd o
utsi
de c
alle
rs fo
llow
the
sam
e in
stru
ctio
ns. Y
ouw
ill h
ear
a m
essa
ge s
tatin
g th
e nu
mbe
r of
mes
sage
s le
ft in
you
r m
ailb
ox.
You
will
then
hea
r th
e M
ailb
ox O
wne
r M
ain
Men
u w
ith th
e fo
llow
ing
optio
ns:
1Li
sten
to
New
Mes
sag
es -
See
Lis
teni
ng t
o y
our
Mes
sag
e.
2R
eco
rd a
nd S
end
Mes
sag
e -
See
Sen
din
g M
essa
ges
.
3R
evie
w S
aved
Mes
sag
es -
See
Lis
teni
ng t
o y
our
Mes
sag
e.
5P
erso
nal G
reet
ing
s -
See
Per
sona
l Gre
etin
gs.
6M
ailb
ox
Ad
min
istr
atio
n -
See
Mai
lbo
x A
dm
inis
trat
ion.
#P
erso
nal S
ervi
ces
- S
ee P
erso
nal S
ervi
ces.
✱D
isco
nnec
t.
GE
TTI
NG
STA
RTE
DU
sing
you
r ne
w m
ailb
ox i
s as
sim
ple
as f
ollo
win
g a
few
sim
ple
spok
enin
stru
ctio
ns.
Firs
t tim
e us
ers
shou
ld r
ead
this
sec
tion
as a
tut
oria
l. Th
e fir
stth
ings
to s
houl
d do
are
:
•A
cces
s yo
ur m
ailb
ox -
You
alre
ady
know
how
to d
o th
is.
•R
ecor
d a
pers
onal
gre
etin
g.•
Cha
nge
your
acc
ess
code
.•
Rec
ord
your
nam
e.
Afte
r yo
u ha
ve c
ompl
eted
the
step
s ab
ove
your
mai
lbox
is s
et u
p an
d re
ady
to u
se.
LIS
TEN
ING
TO
YO
UR
ME
SS
AG
ES
If th
ere
are
new
mes
sage
s in
you
r m
ailb
ox y
our
VM
MS
G k
ey w
ill b
e lit
.
Cal
l the
SV
Mi-4
by
pres
sing
thi
s ke
y, a
nd w
hen
prom
pted
ent
er y
our
pass
-w
ord.
Sel
ect
[1]
to l
iste
n to
new
mes
sage
s or
[3]
to
liste
n to
sav
ed m
es-
sage
s.
1To
pla
y /
repl
ay th
e m
essa
ge y
ou ju
st h
eard
.
11To
pla
y th
e pr
evio
us m
essa
ge.
2To
sav
e th
e m
essa
ge y
ou ju
st h
eard
and
list
en to
the
next
mes
sage
.
3To
del
ete
the
mes
sage
you
just
hea
rd a
nd li
sten
to th
e ne
xt m
essa
ge.
4To
rep
ly to
the
mes
sage
. Thi
s w
ill a
llow
you
to le
ave
a m
essa
ge in
mai
l-bo
x of
the
send
er (
if th
e se
nder
has
a m
ailb
ox o
n th
is s
yste
m).
5To
retu
rn th
e ca
ll di
rect
ly to
the
tele
phon
e nu
mbe
r tha
t lef
t the
mes
sage
.
6To
forw
ard
the
mes
sage
and
sav
es a
cop
y -
See
mes
sage
forw
ardi
ng.
7To
rew
ind
the
mes
sage
5 s
econ
ds.
77To
cha
nge
play
back
vol
ume
of th
e re
cord
ing.
8To
pau
se o
r re
sum
e du
ring
mes
sage
pla
ybac
k.
9To
fast
forw
ard
the
mes
sage
5 s
econ
ds.
99To
cha
nge
play
back
spe
ed o
f the
rec
ordi
ng.
0To
pla
y he
lp o
ptio
ns.
00To
hea
r the
tim
e an
d da
te, a
nd s
ende
r's in
form
atio
n of
the
mes
sage
you
just
hea
rd. S
ende
r in
form
atio
n is
not
ava
ilabl
e on
out
side
cal
ls.
#To
mov
e to
the
nex
t m
essa
ge.
Doe
s no
t sa
ve o
r di
scar
d cu
rren
t m
es-
sage
.
##
To s
can.
Pla
ys fi
rst 7
sec
onds
of m
essa
ge th
en s
kips
to n
ext m
essa
ge.
To s
top
scan
ning
pre
ss [
1].
✱To
can
cel a
nd r
etur
n to
pre
viou
s m
enu.
ME
SS
AG
E F
OR
WA
RD
ING
OP
TIO
NS
If op
tion
[6]
is s
elec
ted
from
the
mes
sage
pla
y m
enu,
you
will
be
give
n th
eop
tion
to fo
rwar
d th
is m
essa
ge to
ano
ther
sub
scrib
er.
The
subs
crib
er c
an b
e se
lect
ed b
y di
alin
g th
e m
ailb
ox n
umbe
r (n
nn),
usi
ngth
e di
rect
ory
serv
ice
(#)
or y
ou m
ay a
lso
add
com
men
ts a
nd le
ave
it as
am
emo
to y
ours
elf (
##
).
The
SE
ND
and
Cop
y S
ervi
ce (
optio
n [6
]) a
llow
s a
user
to s
end
copi
es o
f am
essa
ge to
mul
tiple
rec
ipie
nts
easi
ly. A
diff
eren
t int
rodu
ctio
n m
essa
ge m
aybe
left
for
each
rec
ipie
nt.
SE
ND
ING
ME
SS
AG
ES
Pre
ss [
2] fr
om th
e M
ain
Men
u.
Rec
ord
your
mes
sage
at
the
tone
. A
fter
reco
rdin
g th
e m
essa
ge,
you
will
hear
the
send
men
u w
ith th
e fo
llow
ing
func
tions
:
1S
elec
t the
rec
ipie
nt.
2R
ecor
d th
e m
essa
ge.
3Fo
llow
inst
ruct
ions
to
revi
ew, c
ontin
ue, r
e re
cord
or
acce
pt it
or
cont
in-
ue s
endi
ng it
to o
ther
sub
scrib
ers
usin
g th
e se
nd th
en c
opy
optio
n.
5150
PE
RS
ON
AL
GR
EE
TIN
GS
To s
et p
erso
nal m
ailb
ox g
reet
ing
pres
s [5
] fro
m th
e M
ain
Men
u.
Your
per
sona
l gr
eetin
g w
ill b
e pl
ayed
eve
ry t
ime
som
eone
rea
ches
you
rm
ailb
ox. A
typi
cal t
ext f
or a
per
sona
l gre
etin
g m
essa
ge is
:
"Hi,
this
is ..
......
sor
ry I
can'
t tak
e yo
ur c
all r
ight
now
. Ple
ase
leav
e yo
ur n
ame
and
num
ber
and
I will
get
bac
k to
you
as
soon
as
I can
."
Follo
w t
he i
nstr
uctio
ns t
o re
cord
you
r gr
eetin
g m
essa
ge.
Whe
n yo
u ar
edo
ne A
fter
reco
rdin
g yo
ur m
essa
ge,
you
will
be
able
to
liste
n to
the
mes
-sa
ge y
ou r
ecor
ded,
sav
e th
e m
essa
ge y
ou r
ecor
ded,
and
ret
urn
to th
e pr
e-vi
ous
men
u, r
ecor
d th
e m
essa
ge a
gain
, or
exit
with
out s
avin
g th
e m
essa
ge.
MA
ILB
OX
AD
MIN
ISTR
ATI
ON
The
Mai
lbox
Adm
inis
trat
ion
men
u is
use
d to
turn
on
and
off y
our p
ager
not
i-fic
atio
n, m
essa
ge a
lert
opt
ions
and
oth
er s
ent m
essa
ge c
ontr
ol fe
atur
es.
Mes
sag
e A
lert
Whe
n th
is f
unct
ion
is a
ctiv
ated
, th
e S
VM
i-4 w
ill c
all
any
outs
ide
or i
nsid
ete
leph
one
num
ber
afte
r ea
ch m
essa
ge is
left
in y
our
voic
e m
ailb
ox. T
o he
aryo
ur m
essa
ge a
t the
rem
ote
loca
tion,
pic
k up
the
tele
phon
e an
d en
ter
your
acce
ss c
ode.
• Fr
om th
e m
ailb
ox m
ain
men
u pr
ess
[6]
for
mai
lbox
adm
inis
trat
ion.
• P
ress
[1]
for
mes
sage
ale
rt.
• 2
optio
ns a
re a
vaila
ble
to y
ou.
Pre
ss [
1] to
togg
le m
essa
ge a
lert
on
and
off.
Pre
ss [
2] to
set
the
dest
inat
ion
phon
e nu
mbe
r.
Pag
er N
otif
icat
ion
Whe
n th
is fu
nctio
n is
act
ivat
ed, t
he S
VM
i-4 w
ill c
all y
our
beep
er s
ervi
ce a
ndno
tify
you
afte
r ea
ch m
essa
ge is
left
in y
our
voic
e m
ailb
ox.
•Fr
om th
e m
ailb
ox m
ain
men
u pr
ess
[6]
for
mai
lbox
adm
inis
trat
ion.
•P
ress
[2]
for
page
r no
tific
atio
n.•
Onl
y on
e op
tion
is a
vaila
ble
to y
ou.
Pre
ss [
1] to
togg
le p
ager
not
ifica
tion
on a
nd o
ff.*Y
our p
ager
num
ber m
ust b
e pr
ogra
mm
ed b
y th
e sy
stem
adm
inis
trat
or.
Und
elet
eW
hen
this
func
tion
is a
ctiv
ated
, the
SV
Mi-4
will
allo
w y
ou to
und
elet
e an
y m
es-
sage
s th
at y
ou h
ave
rece
ntly
del
eted
(up
to 3
am
the
follo
win
g m
orni
ng).
•Fr
om th
e m
ailb
ox m
ain
men
u pr
ess
[6]
for
mai
lbox
adm
inis
trat
ion.
•P
ress
[3]
for
page
r no
tific
atio
n.D
elet
ed v
oice
mai
l mes
sage
s ar
e te
mpo
raril
y st
ored
in m
emor
y un
til 3
am t
he f
ollo
win
g da
y. S
elec
t th
is o
ptio
n to
rec
over
("u
ndel
ete"
) pr
evi-
ousl
y de
lete
d m
essa
ges
durin
g th
is p
erio
d of
tim
e.
Und
eliv
ered
Ret
riev
alW
hen
this
func
tion
is a
ctiv
ated
, the
SV
Mi-4
will
allo
w y
ou to
rec
all a
ny m
es-
sage
s yo
u ha
ve s
ent t
hat h
ave
not y
et b
een
pick
ed u
p by
the
reci
pien
t.
•Fr
om th
e m
ailb
ox m
ain
men
u pr
ess
[6]
for
mai
lbox
adm
inis
trat
ion.
•P
ress
[4]
for
unde
liver
ed m
essa
ges.
This
use
ful f
eatu
re w
ill a
llow
you
to c
ance
l any
mes
sage
s th
at h
ave
not
yet b
een
pick
ed u
p by
the
reci
pien
t.
PE
RS
ON
AL
SE
RV
ICE
STh
e P
erso
nal A
dmin
istr
atio
n m
enu
is u
sed
to s
et y
our
pass
wor
d an
d re
cord
your
nam
e.
Set
ting
yo
ur P
assw
ord
•Fr
om th
e m
ain
mai
lbox
men
u pr
ess
[#].
•P
ress
[1]
. Th
e cu
rren
t pa
ssw
ord
will
be
play
ed a
nd y
ou w
ill h
ave
the
chan
ce to
cha
nge
it.
Rec
ord
ing
yo
ur N
ame
Use
this
opt
ion
to r
ecor
d yo
ur n
ame.
You
r re
cord
ed n
ame
is p
laye
d in
sev
-er
al d
iffer
ent
situ
atio
ns. I
t is
impo
rtan
t to
reco
rd y
our
nam
e fo
r pr
oper
ope
r-at
ion
of t
he S
VM
i-4 s
yste
m.
•Fr
om th
e m
ain
mai
lbox
men
u pr
ess
[#].
•P
ress
[2]
. The
cur
rent
nam
e w
ill b
e pl
ayed
and
you
will
hav
e th
e ch
ance
to c
hang
e it.
KE
YS
ET
US
ER
FE
ATU
RE
STh
e fo
llow
ing
optio
ns a
re a
vaila
ble
if yo
u ha
ve a
key
set.
They
req
uire
set
upby
the
syst
em a
dmin
istr
ator
.
Mes
sag
e W
aitin
g L
igh
tsW
hen
a ne
w m
essa
ge is
left
in y
our
mai
lbox
, th
e vo
ice
mai
l mes
sage
ligh
ton
you
r ke
yset
will
fla
sh.
Pre
ss t
his
flash
ing
key
and
follo
w t
he p
rom
pts
tore
trie
ve m
essa
ges.
5352
PE
RS
ON
AL
SP
EE
D D
IAL
NU
MB
ER
S
CO
DE
NA
ME
TELE
PH
ON
E N
UM
BE
R
00__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
01__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
02__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
03__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
04__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
05__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
06__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
07__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
08__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
09__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
10__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
11__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
12__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
13__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
14__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
15__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
16__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
17__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
18__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
19__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
20__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
21__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
22__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
23__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
24__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
55
Sh
ort
cuts
Cal
ling
Cal
ling
a st
atio
n th
at is
bus
y or
doe
s no
t ans
wer
you
can
pre
ss [
#]
to im
me-
diat
ely
send
the
call
to th
e ca
lled
part
ies
mai
lbox
.
Bei
ng C
alle
d
If yo
ur p
hone
rin
gs a
nd y
ou w
ant t
o se
nd th
e ca
ller
dire
ctly
to y
our
mai
lbox
,si
mpl
y pr
ess
[#].
Dir
ect
Mes
sag
ing
[#]
+ D
SS
To
mak
e it
easy
to le
ave
mes
sage
s fo
r oth
ers
in y
our o
ffice
with
-ou
t hav
ing
to d
ial t
heir
exte
nsio
n nu
mbe
r fir
st, k
eyse
t use
rs m
ay s
impl
y di
al[#
] pl
us a
mai
lbox
(ex
tens
ion)
num
ber
and
leav
e a
mes
sage
dire
ctly
. If y
oudi
al a
bus
y ex
tens
ion
pres
s [#
] to
con
nect
dire
ctly
with
the
mai
lbox
.
Sel
f M
emo
[#]
+ [
#]
Pre
ssin
g [#
#]
will
leav
e a
mes
sage
in y
our
own
mai
lbox
.
INTE
RA
CTI
VE
DIS
PLA
YS
FO
R S
VM
i-4
Dis
play
key
set u
sers
hav
e th
e ad
ded
adva
ntag
e of
usi
ng th
e so
ft ke
ys a
nddi
spla
ys t
o pl
ay,
sav
e, d
elet
e, r
eply
, ca
ll, f
wd,
rew
ind,
pau
se,
fast
for
war
d,ch
ange
the
volu
me,
get
mes
sage
info
rmat
ion,
or
help
.
Vie
win
g M
ailb
ox
Co
nten
tsIf
you
have
new
mes
sage
s, in
add
ition
to th
e m
essa
ge w
aitin
g lig
ht y
ou w
illbe
abl
e to
use
the
key
set
disp
lays
and
sof
t ke
ys t
o co
mm
unic
ate
with
the
SV
Mi-4
.
54
56
PE
RS
ON
AL
SP
EE
D D
IAL
NU
MB
ER
S
CO
DE
NA
ME
TELE
PH
ON
E N
UM
BE
R
25__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
26__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
27__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
28__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
29__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
30__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
31__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
32__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
33__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
34__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
35__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
36__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
37__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
38__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
39__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
40__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
41__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
42__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
43__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
44__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
45__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
46__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
47__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
48__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
49__
____
____
____
____
____
___
____
____
____
____
____
____
_
T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S
I N S T A L L A T I O N S E C T I O N
PART DESCRIPTION PAGE
1 SITE REQUIREMENTS .................................................................... 1.1
2 INSTALLATION OF BASIC KSU AND EXPANSION CABINET
2.1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTION ................................................... 2.1
2.2 KEY SERVICE UNIT INSTALLATION ............................................. 2.1
2.3 EXPANSION CABINET INSTALLATION......................................... 2.1
2.4 GROUNDING ................................................................................ 2.2
2.5 MDF CABLING .............................................................................. 2.4
3 INSTALLING PRINTED CIRCUIT CARDS
3.1 SMEM2 CARD ............................................................................... 3.1
3.2 2 SLI CARD.................................................................................... 3.1
3.3 SMISC1 CARD ............................................................................... 3.1
3.4 SMISC2 CARD ............................................................................... 3.1
3.5 2 X 4 DLI CARD ............................................................................. 3.2
3.6 S8DLI CARD .................................................................................. 3.2
3.7 2 X 4 SLI CARD ............................................................................. 3.2
3.8 S8SLI CARD .................................................................................. 3.2
3.9 S3TRK CARD................................................................................. 3.2
3.10 S6TRK CARD................................................................................. 3.2
3.11 2 E & M 4 DLI CARD ...................................................................... 3.2
3.12 S4BRI CARD.................................................................................. 3.3
3.13 SPLL DAUGHTER BOARD ............................................................ 3.4
3.14 MODEM CARD .............................................................................. 3.4
4 POWER UP PROCEDURES
4.1 CONNECT POWER TO THE SYSTEM .......................................... 4.1
4.2 SMEM2 CARD INDICATIONS ........................................................ 4.1
DCS 50si INSTALLATIONTECHNICAL MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS JUNE 2001
4.3 PCB VERIFICATION ...................................................................... 4.2
4.4 DEFAULT TRUNK AND STATION NUMBERING ............................ 4.2
5 CONNECTING TELCO CIRCUITS
5.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................................................... 5.1
5.2 LOOP START LINES ...................................................................... 5.1
5.3 OFF PREMISE EXTENSIONS (OPX) ............................................. 5.1
5.4 E&M TIE LINES ............................................................................. 5.1
5.5 ISDN BRI LINES ............................................................................ 5.2
6 CONNECTING STATION EQUIPMENT
6.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................................................... 6.1
6.2 DCS 50si KEYSET ......................................................................... 6.1
6.3 ADD-ON MODULE ......................................................................... 6.1
6.4 SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE .......................................................... 6.1
6.5 DOOR PHONE AND DOOR LOCK RELEASE................................ 6.1
6.6 ISDN BRI STATIONS...................................................................... 6.2
6.7A WALL-MOUNTING KEYSETS ........................................................ 6.2
6.7B WALL-MOUNTING KEYSETS WITH ULTRA BASE WEDGE .......... 6.3
6.7C WALL-MOUNTING FALCON KEYSETS ......................................... 6.2
6.8 64 BUTTON MODULES ................................................................. 6.3
6.9 ATTACHING DCS 32 BUTTON AOM AND DCS 64 BUTTONMODULES TO MASTER STATION ................................................. 6.3
6.10 ATTACHING FALCON 64 BUTTON MODULESTO A FALCON KEYSET ................................................................. 6.4
7 CONNECTING OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
7.1 MUSIC ON HOLD/BACKGROUND MUSIC .................................... 7.1
7.2 EXTERNAL PAGING ...................................................................... 7.1
7.3 COMMON BELL ............................................................................ 7.2
7.4 RING OVER PAGE ......................................................................... 7.2
7.5 STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR)...................... 7.2
7.6 PC PROGRAMMING...................................................................... 7.3
DCS 50si INSTALLATIONTECHNICAL MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS JUNE 2001
DCS 50si INSTALLATIONTECHNICAL MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS JUNE 2001
7.7 REMOTE PROGRAMMING............................................................ 7.3
7.8 POWER FAILURE TRANSFER (PFT) ............................................. 7.3
7.9 VOICE MAIL/AUTO ATTENDANT .................................................. 7.3
7.10 COMPUTER TELEPHONY MODULE (CTM) .................................. 7.4
7.11 CONNECTING SYSTEM BACKUP BATTERIESTO THE DCS 50si POWER SUPPLY .............................................. 7.4
8 INSTALLING KEYSET DAUGHTERBOARDS
8.1 KDB DLI ......................................................................................... 8.1
8.2 KBD SLI ......................................................................................... 8.1
8.3 CONNECTING TO THE KDBS....................................................... 8.1
9 CHANGING SOFTWARE
9.1 REPLACING THE EPROMS .......................................................... 9.1
10 INSTALLING CALLER ID
10.1 GENERAL INFORMATION .......................................................... 10.1
10.2 INSTALLING ON A SYSTEM WITHOUT AN SMISC CARD .......... 10.2
11 ADDING CARDS TO AN EXISTING SYSTEM
11.1 ADDING AN SMISC CARD .......................................................... 11.1
11.2 ADDING A 2 SLI CARD ................................................................ 11.1
11.3 ADDING AN S3TRK CARD .......................................................... 11.2
11.4 ADDING AN S6TRK CARD .......................................................... 11.2
11.5 ADDING AN S8DLI CARD............................................................ 11.2
11.6 ADDING AN S8SLI CARD ............................................................ 11.2
11.7 ADDING A 2 X 4 CARD ................................................................ 11.3
11.8 ADDING AN S4BRI CARD ........................................................... 11.3
11.9 ADDING AN SPLL DAUGHTER BOARD...................................... 11.3
11.10 ADDING A MODEM CARD........................................................... 11.4
12 INSTALLING A CADENCE (CVM8A) CARD
12.1 SYSTEM SIZE WITH CADENCE .................................................. 12.1
12.2 REMOVING THE COVER ............................................................ 12.1
12.3 ADDING A SECOND VOICE PROCESSING MODULE (VPM) ..... 12.1
12.4 INSERTING THE CARD ............................................................... 12.1
12.5 UPGRADING AN EXISTING CARD TO 8 PORTS ........................ 12.2
13 INSTALLING A SVMi-4 CARD
13.1 SYSTEM SIZE WITH A SVMi-4 CARD INSTALLED ...................... 13.1
13.2 UPGRADING THE SVMi-4 TO FOUR PORTS .............................. 13.1
DCS 50si INSTALLATIONTECHNICAL MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS JUNE 2001
DCS 50si INSTALLATIONTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 6 JUNE 2001
6.1
PART 6. CONNECTING STATION EQUIPMENT
6.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONSTo limit the risk of personal injury, always follow these precautions before connectingtelephone circuits:
a. Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.b. Never install telephone jacks in a wet location unless the jack is specifically
designed for wet locations.c. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has
been disconnected at the network interface.d. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
6.2 KEYSETSUsing one pair twisted #24 AWG or #26 AWG jumper wire, cross-connect each keysetto the DLI port of your choice (see Figures 6–1, 6–2 and 6-3).
NOTE: Because the DCS 50si is a self-configuring system, if you connect a 12 buttonkeyset to a DLI port that previously had a 24 button keyset installed, theexisting data will be rewritten with 12 button keyset default data (see MMC723).
6.3 DCS 32 BUTTON ADD-ON MODULEUsing one pair twisted #24 AWG or #26 AWG jumper wire, cross-connect each add-onmodule (AOM) to the DLI port of your choice (see Figures 6–4, 6-5 and 6-6).
If an AOM is to operate as a stand-alone unit, there is nothing else required other thanassigning keys. When an AOM is to be used with a station, it must be assigned in MMC209. Add-on modules can be assigned to any keyset.
6.4 SINGLE LINE TELEPHONEUsing one pair twisted #24 AWG or #26 AWG jumper wire, cross-connect each singleline telephone to the SLI port of your choice (see Figures 6–7, 6–8 and 6-9).
6.5 DOOR PHONE AND DOOR LOCK RELEASEUsing one pair twisted #24 AWG or #26 AWG jumper wire, cross-connect each DPIMto the DLI port of your choice (see Figures 6–10, 6-11 and 6–12). Next, connect theDPIM to the door phone using #24 AWG or #26 AWG twisted pair wire.
DCS 50si INSTALLATIONTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 6 JUNE 2001
6.2
When a customer-provided electric door release is installed, cross-connect thecorresponding door release contacts on the DPIM to the door lock mechanism (seeFigures 6–10, 6-11 and 6–12). Use MMC 501 to program the duration of the contactclosure as required. See the user guides for door lock release operation. The doorrelease contacts on the DPIM are to be used for low voltage relay control only. Thecontacts are rated at 24 VDC-1 amp.
WARNING: Do not attempt to connect commercial AC power to these contacts.
6.6 ISDN BRI STATIONSThe DCS 50si uses an S/T type interface so if the BRI station equipment requires a Utype circuit then an NT1 must be connected between the DCS 50si and the stationequipment. This will convert the circuit from the S/T type 4 wire interface provided bythe DCS 50si to the U type 2 wire interface required by the station equipment. In thiscase the maximum distance of the BRI station equipment from the DCS 50si isdetermined by the specifications of the NT1.
Using two pair twisted #24 AWG or #26 AWG jumper wire cross-connect any BRI portto the BRI station equipment (or NT1), (see Figure 6-13).
For information regarding the programming of a BRI circuit please see the SpecialApplications part of the Programming section of this manual.
6.7A WALL-MOUNTING KEYSETSDCS keysets come equipped with a reversible base wedge. To wall-mount a keyset,remove the wedge from the keyset and remove the directory tray from the wedge.Mount the wedge to the wall using one of the methods below (see Figure 6-14).
Use screw holes 1 and 2 to attach the base wedge to a standard electrical outlet box.
OR
Use screw holes 1 and 3 to attach to a standard telephone wall-mount plate withlocking pins. This method can cause the keyset to wobble as the keyset feet do not fitsecurely to the mounting surface.
OR
Use screw holes 4 and 5 if you are mounting on dry wall with a hole in the middle forcable access.
DCS 50si INSTALLATIONTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 6 JUNE 2001
6.3
6.7B WALL-MOUNTING KEYSETS WITH ULTRA BASEWEDGEDCS keysets now come equipped with a new Ultra Base wedge. These base wedgesare reversible and can be used for wall-mounting however not every wall mountingscenario is appropriate. First and foremost there is only one keyhole in the center of thebase attaching to the wall, and these base wedges can not be used with the standardwall mount bracket with the two button/pins. To wall-mount the keyset using Ultra Basewedges use screw holes 1, 2 and 3 to mount the base wedge on dry wall with the holein the middle for cable access (see Figure 6-15).
6.7C WALL-MOUNTING FALCON KEYSETSFALCON keysets come equipped with a reversible base wedge. To wall-mount akeyset, remove the wedge from the keyset and mount the wedge to the wall using oneof the methods below (see Figure 6-15A).
Use screw holes 1 and 2 to attach the base wedge to a standard electrical outlet box.OR
Use screw holes 1 and 3 to attach to a standard telephone wall-mount plate withlocking pins. This method can cause the keyset to wobble as the keyset feet do not fitsecurely to the mounting surface.
6.8 64 BUTTON MODULESUsing one pair twisted #24 AWG or #26 AWG jumper wire, cross-connect each 64button module (64 BM) to the DLI port or plug into the DLI daughter board or yourchoice (see part 8 of the installation section). The 64 BM module can be assigned toany keyset telephone. It must be assigned to that station in MMC 309. A maximum offour (4) 64 button modules can be programmed in the DCS 50si system. A maximum oftwo (2) 64 button modules per keyset.
6.9 ATTACHING DCS 32 BUTTON AOM AND DCS 64BUTTON MODULES TO MASTER STATIONThese new Ultra Base Wedges allow a connector clip (packaged with 64B Modules andAOMs) to be connected to the underside of the new style wedge and attach AOM(s) or64B module(s) together with the main or “master” station. This “clip” allows multiple64B modules and or AOMs to be secured or “chained” together to the main or “master”station they are associated with. This will make instruments associated with each otherseem as one unit (see Figure 6-16, 6-17 and 6-18).
DCS 50si INSTALLATIONTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 6 JUNE 2001
6.4
6.10 ATTACHING FALCON 64 BUTTON MODULES TOA FALCON KEYSETFirst remove the base wedge from the FALCON 64 Button Module and attach thebracket to it with two of the screws provided (see Figure 6-19).
Remove the base wedge of the keyset and place it to the right of the 64 Button Moduleand attach the bracket/64BM to the keyset with the remaining two screws.
The base wedge can now be replaced.
NOTE: If you wish to attach two 64 button modules to a keyset, connect the 64 buttonmodules together first and then attach them to the keyset.
FIGURE 6-7ULTRA BASE WEDGE FIGURE 6–15A
DCS 50si INSTALLATION
TECHNICAL MANUAL PART 6 MAY 2000
HOLES FOR MOUNTING SCREWS
NOTE: THE DIRECTORY CARD SLIDE TRAY IS NOT USED WHEN THEKEYSET IS WALL-MOUNTED.
1
2 3
USED FOR ATTACHINGAOM OR 64B MODULE
WITH CONNECTOR CLIP
FIGURE 6-7WALL-MOUNTINGA FALCON KEYSET
FIGURE 6–15B
DCS 50si INSTALLATION
TECHNICAL MANUAL PART 6 JUNE 2001
1
2
3
FIGURE 6-7ATTACHING 24B/12B TO 64BM FIGURE 6–16
DCS 50si INSTALLATION
TECHNICAL MANUAL PART 6 MAY 2000
ME
TA
L
CO
NN
EC
TO
R
CLIP
24
B/
12
BU
LT
RA
BA
SE
WE
DG
E6
4B
MU
LT
RA
BA
SE
WE
DG
E
GR
OO
VE
FO
R
AD
DIT
ION
AL
CO
NN
EC
TO
R
CLIP
ATTACHING 24B/12B TO AOM
DCS 50si INSTALLATION
TECHNICAL MANUAL PART 6 MAY 2000
ME
TA
L
CO
NN
EC
TO
R
CLIP
24
B/
12
BU
LT
RA
BA
SE
WE
DG
EA
OM
ULT
RA
BA
SE
WE
DG
E
GR
OO
VE
FO
R
AD
DIT
ION
AL
CO
NN
EC
TO
R
CLIP
FIGURE 6–17
FIGURE 6-7ATTACHING7B/SINGLE LINE TO AOM AND7B/SINGLE LINE TO 64BM
FIGURE 6–18
DCS 50si INSTALLATION
TECHNICAL MANUAL PART 6 MAY 2000
METAL CONNECTOR CLIP
7B / SINGLE LINE ULTRA BASE WEDGE AOM ULTRA BASE WEDGE
7B/SINGLE LINE ULTRA BASE WEDGE 64BM ULTRA BASE WEDGE
METAL CONNECTOR CLIP
FIGURE 6-7ATTACHINGFALCON 64 BUTTON MODULETO A FALCON KEYSET
FIGURE 6–19
DCS 50si INSTALLATION
TECHNICAL MANUAL PART 6 JUNE 2001
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 104 STATION NAME
DESCRIPTION:Allows the system administrator or technician to enter an eleven (11) charactername to identify an individual station.
Names are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character. Pressingthe dial pad key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directoryname is “SAM SMITH,” press the number “7” three times to get the letter “S.” Pressthe number “2” once to get the letter “A.” Continue selecting characters from thetable below to complete your message. Pressing the bottom left programmable keywill change the letter from upper case to lower case.
NOTE: When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as theprevious character, press the UP key to move the cursor to the right.
• DCS KEYSETS
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5DIAL 0 Q Z . ) 0DIAL 1 space ? , ! 1DIAL 2 A B C @ 2DIAL 3 D E F # 3DIAL 4 G H I $ 4DIAL 5 J K L % 5DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6DIAL 7 P R S & 7DIAL 8 T U V ✱ 8DIAL 9 W X Y ( 9DIAL ✱✱✱✱ : = [ ] ✱
The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %,$, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 104
• FALCON KEYSETS
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5
DIAL 0 < > . ) 0DIAL 1 space ? , ! 1DIAL 2 A B C @ 2DIAL 3 D E F # 3DIAL 4 G H I $ 4DIAL 5 J K L % 5DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6DIAL 7 P Q R S 7DIAL 8 T U V ✱ 8DIAL 9 W X Y Z 9DIAL ✱ : = [ ] ✱
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previouscharacter, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN Used to scroll through optionsKEYPAD Used to enter selectionsSOFT KEYS Move cursor left and rightSPK Used to store data and advance to next MMCHOLD Used to clear previous entryA Key 19; acts as toggle between upper case and lower case
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press TRSF 104Display shows
[201] STN NAME
2. Dial the station number (e.g., 205)OR
[205] STN NAME_
Press UP or DOWN to select stationand press RIGHT soft key to move cursor
3. Enter the station name using the proceduredescribed above
[205] STN NAMESAM SMITH
Press the RIGHT soft key to return to step 2
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 104
4. Press TRSF to store and exitOR
Press SPK to store and advance to next MMC
DEFAULT DATA: NONE
RELATED ITEMS: “A” BUTTON IS BUTTON #19 ON KEYSET
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 106 STATION SPEED DIAL NAME
DESCRIPTION:Allows an eleven (11) character name to be entered for each personal speed diallocation. This name enables the speed dial number to be located when the directorydial feature is used. The directory dial feature allows the display keyset user toselect a speed dial location by viewing its name.
Names are written using the keypad. Each press of a key selects a character.Pressing the dial keypad moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if thedirectory name is “SAM SMITH,” press the number “7” three times to get the letter“S.” Press the number “2” once to get the letter “A.” Continue selecting charactersfrom the table below to complete your message. Pressing the bottom leftprogrammable key changes the letter from upper case to lower case.
NOTE: When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as theprevious character, press the UP key to move the cursor to the right.
• DCS KEYSETS
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5DIAL 0 Q Z . ) 0DIAL 1 space ? , ! 1DIAL 2 A B C @ 2DIAL 3 D E F # 3DIAL 4 G H I $ 4DIAL 5 J K L % 5DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6DIAL 7 P R S & 7DIAL 8 T U V ✱ 8DIAL 9 W X Y ( 9DIAL ✱✱✱✱ : = [ ] ✱
The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %,$, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 106
• FALCON KEYSETS
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5
DIAL 0 < > . ) 0DIAL 1 space ? , ! 1DIAL 2 A B C @ 2DIAL 3 D E F # 3DIAL 4 G H I $ 4DIAL 5 J K L % 5DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6DIAL 7 P Q R S 7DIAL 8 T U V ✱ 8DIAL 9 W X Y Z 9DIAL ✱ : = [ ] ✱
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previouscharacter, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN Used to scroll through optionsKEYPAD Used to enter selectionsSOFT KEYS Move cursor left and rightSPK Used to store data and advance to next MMCHOLD Used to clear previous entryA Key 19; acts as toggle between upper case and lower case
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press TRSF 106Display shows
[201] SPEED NAME00:
2a. Dial station number (e.g., 205)OR
[205] SPEED NAME00:
Press UP or DOWN to select stationand press RIGHT soft key to move cursor
[305] SPEED NAMESPDBLK NOT EXIST
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 106
2b. Dial station number (e.g., 305)OR
Press UP or DOWN to select stationspeed blocks not assigned
3. Dial speed dial location (e.g., 05)OR
[205] SPEED NAME01:_
Use UP or DOWN to scroll throughlocation numbers and use the RIGHTsoft key to move the cursor
ORPress the LEFT soft key to return to step 2
4. Enter the location name using the proceduresdescribed above and press RIGHT soft key
[205] SPEED NAME01:SAM SMITH
to return to step 2OR
Press LEFT soft key to return to step 3 tocontinue entries
5. Press TRSF to store and exitOR
Press SPK to store and advance to next MMC
DEFAULT DATA: NONE
RELATED ITEMS: MMC 105 STATION SPEED DIAL
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 116 ALARM AND MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION:
Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change the alarmclock/appointment reminder feature for any station. This must be done for singleline telephone because they cannot access programming. Three alarms may be setfor each station and each alarm may be defined as a one-time or TODAY alarm oras a DAILY alarm as described below. The TODAY alarm is automatically canceledafter it rings while the DAILY alarm rings every day at the same time. It is alsopossible to set a message to display when the alarm is sounded. Alarm numbersare 1, 2 and 3.
Entry Alarm Type
DIAL 1 NOTSETDIAL 2 TODAYDIAL 3 DAILY
Messages are written using the keypad. Each press of a key will select a character.Pressing the dial pad key will move the cursor to the next position. For example, ifthe directory name is “SAM SMITH,” press the number “7” three times to get theletter “S.” Now press the number “2” once to get the letter “A.” Continue selectingcharacters from the table below to complete your message. Pressing the “A” keywill change the letter from upper case to lower case.
• DCS KEYSETS
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5DIAL 0 Q Z . ) 0DIAL 1 space ? , ! 1DIAL 2 A B C @ 2DIAL 3 D E F # 3DIAL 4 G H I $ 4DIAL 5 J K L % 5DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6DIAL 7 P R S & 7DIAL 8 T U V ✱ 8DIAL 9 W X Y ( 9DIAL ✱✱✱✱ : = [ ] ✱
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 116
The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %,$, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.
• FALCON KEYSETS
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5
DIAL 0 < > . ) 0DIAL 1 space ? , ! 1DIAL 2 A B C @ 2DIAL 3 D E F # 3DIAL 4 G H I $ 4DIAL 5 J K L % 5DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6DIAL 7 P Q R S 7DIAL 8 T U V ✱ 8DIAL 9 W X Y Z 9DIAL ✱ : = [ ] ✱
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previouscharacter, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN Used to scroll through optionsKEYPAD Used to enter selectionsSOFT KEYS Move cursor left and rightSPK Used to store data and advance to next MMCHOLD Used to clear previous entryA Key 19; acts as toggle between upper case and lower case
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press TRSF 116Display shows
[201]ALM REM(1)HHMM: NOTSET
2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)OR
[205]ALM REM(1)HHMM: NOTSET
Press UP or DOWN to select stationand press RIGHT soft key to move cursor
ORPress ANS/RLS to select all stations
[ALL]ALM REM(1)HHMM: NOTSET
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 116
3. Dial 1–3 to select alarm (e.g., 2)OR
[201]ALM REM(1)HHMM: NOTSET
Press UP or DOWN to select alarm andpress RIGHT soft key to move cursor
ORPress LEFT soft key to return to step 2
4. Enter alarm time in 24 hour clock format(e.g., 1300)
[205]ALM REM (2)HHMM:1300 NOTSET
Display will automatically advance to step 5
5. Dial valid entry from above list for alarm typeOR
[205]ALM REMHHMM:1300 DAILY
Press UP or DOWN to select alarm typePress RIGHT soft key to move cursor
6. Enter messages using above tablePress RIGHT soft key to return to step 2
[205]ALM REMSam SMITH
7. Press TRSF to store and exitOR
Press SPK to store and advance to next MMC
DEFAULT DATA: ALARMS SET TO NOTSET
RELATED ITEMS: NONE
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 209 ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE
DESCRIPTION:
Designates to which keyset a DCS 32 Button Add-On Module (AOM) or 64 ButtonModule is assigned to and determines if an off-hook voice announce (OHVA) will bereceived via a DCS 32 Button Add-On Module (AOM only). OHVAED:YES allows off-hook voice announce to an AOM. In the DCS the maximum number of AOM’s a keysetcan have assigned to it is 2. The maximum number of 64 button add-on modules thatcan be assigned to a keyset is 2. The DCS will support a maximum of 4, 64 buttonmodules per system.
NOTE: The 64 BTN Module’s do not have a speaker or microphone so they willNOT support the off-hook voice announce feature.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN Used to scroll through optionsKEYPAD Used to enter selectionsSOFT KEYS Move cursor left and rightRELEASE Used to store data and advance to next MMCHOLD Clears previous entry
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press TRSF 209Display shows first AOM or 64Btn
[301] AOM MASTERMASTER:NONE
2. Dial AOM numberOR
[301] AOM MASTERMASTER:NONE
Use UP or DOWN to scroll through AOMnumbers and use soft keys to move cursor
3a. Enter station number, e.g., 301OR
[301] AOM MASTERMASTER:201
Use UP or DOWN for selection of stationsAND
3b. Enter 1 for OHVAED: ON or 0 for OFFOR
[301] AOM MASTEROHVAED:ON
Use UP or DOWN to scroll through ON/OFFoptionsPress RIGHT soft key to return to step 2
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 209
4. Press TRSF to store and exitOR
Press SPK to save and advance to next MMC
DEFAULT DATA: NONE FOR MASTEROFF FOR OHVAED
RELATED ITEMS: NONE
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 213 ALARM MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION:
Allows the assignment of a name to an alarm sensor. Names are written using thedial keypad. Each press of a key will select a character. Pressing the dial key willmove the cursor to the next position. For example, if the sensor name is “FIRE,”press the number “3” three times to get the letter “F.” Now press the number “4”three times to get the letter “I.” Continue selecting characters from the table belowto complete your message.
NOTE: When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as theprevious character, press the UP key to move the cursor to the right or the DOWNkey to move the cursor left. A space can be entered by using these keys. Pressingthe “A” key will change the letter from upper case to lower case.
• DCS KEYSETS
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5DIAL 0 Q Z . ) 0DIAL 1 space ? , ! 1DIAL 2 A B C @ 2DIAL 3 D E F # 3DIAL 4 G H I $ 4DIAL 5 J K L % 5DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6DIAL 7 P R S & 7DIAL 8 T U V ✱ 8DIAL 9 W X Y ( 9DIAL ✱✱✱✱ : = [ ] ✱
The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %,$, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 213
• FALCON KEYSETS
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5
DIAL 0 < > . ) 0DIAL 1 space ? , ! 1DIAL 2 A B C @ 2DIAL 3 D E F # 3DIAL 4 G H I $ 4DIAL 5 J K L % 5DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6DIAL 7 P Q R S 7DIAL 8 T U V ✱ 8DIAL 9 W X Y Z 9DIAL ✱ : = [ ] ✱
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previouscharacter, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN Used to scroll through optionsKEYPAD Used to enter selectionsSOFT KEYS Move cursor left and rightSPK Used to store data and advance to next MMCHOLD Used to clear previous entryA Key 19; acts as toggle between upper case and lower case
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press TRSF 213Display shows
[213] ALARM NAME
2. Dial ALARM number ( e.g., 351)OR
[351] ALARM NAME
Press UP or DOWN key to make selectionPress RIGHT soft key to move cursor
3. Enter name using above method and tablePress RIGHT soft key to return to step 2
[351] ALARM NAMEFIRE!
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 213
4. Press TRSF to store and exitOR
Press SPK to store and advance to next MMC
DEFAULT DATA: NONE
RELATED ITEMS: MMC 212 ALARM RINGING STATION
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 315 CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION
DESCRIPTION:Customer Set Relocation allows System Administration level or Technician levelaccess to relocate or exchange similar station in the DCS without wiring changes(see Allow Table bellow). This program is a one for one exchange with like stations.ie. Single line to single line, 7 button keyset to 7 button keyset, etc. All individualstation assignments such as trunk ring, station group, station COS, station speeddial, button appearances, etc. will follow the Customer Set Relocation program. 12button keysets and 24 button keysets can be exchanged. Basic 7 button keysetscan be exchanged with Basic 7 button key sets. Add On Modules can also beexchanged with other Add On Modules. Single line stations numbers can beexchanged. If incompatible set types are selected the DCS system will provide anERROR: NO MATCH message. If AOM units are to be exchanged the AOM Masterassignment must be removed prior to using Customer Set relocation. If the AOMMaster station is not removed the error code ERROR: NOT ALONE will appear onthe LCD display. A station must be in the idle state (on hook) to perform CustomerSet Relocation. If a wired location has a station port connected but no telephoneinstrument the Customer Set Relocation program will allow set relocation as long asthe station types are similar.
12 button and 24 button key assignments should be taken in consideration whenrelocating these types of sets due to the button configurations of the instruments. Ifa 12 button set and a 24 button set are exchanged using the Customer SetRelocation program the first twelve buttons on the 24 button set will have the buttonprogramming of the 12 button set. The 12 button set will then have theprogramming of the first twelve buttons of the 24 button set. In other words, whenexchanging 12 and 24 button set only the first twelve buttons will swapped.
NOTE: Customer access to this feature is default OFF in MMC 802.
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 315
CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION ALLOW TABLE
S/L 7 BTNBSC12
LCD12
BSC24
LCD24
32AOM
DCS &FALCON 64
AOM
8BUTTONFALCON
18BUTTONFALCON
28BUTTONFALCON
S/L YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO7 BTN NO YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NOBSC 12 NO NO YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NOLCD 12 NO NO YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NOBSC 24 NO NO YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NOLCD 24 NO NO YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO32 AOM NO NO NO NO NO NO YES YES YES YES YESDCS &FALCON64 AOM
NO NO NO NO NO NO YES YES YES YES YES
8 BUTTONFALCON NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES NO NO18BUTTONFALCON
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES YES
28BUTTONFALCON
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES YES
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN Used to scroll through optionsKEYPAD Used to enter selectionsSOFT KEYS Move cursor left and rightSPK Used to store data and advance to next MMCHOLD Used to clear previous entryANS/RLS Used to select ALL
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press TRSF 315Display shows
SET RELOCATIONEXT _ EXT
2. Enter first station number (e.g.,202)press RIGHT soft key to move cursor
SET RELOCATIONEXT 202 EXT _
3. Enter second station number (e.g.,210)Press RIGHT softkey to enter data
SET RELOCATEEXT 202 EXT 210
4. Display will return to STEP 1Go to STEP 2
SET RELOCATIONEXT _ EXT
OR
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 315
5. Press SPK to advance to next MMC
DEFAULT DATA: NONE
RELATED ITEMS: MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMINGMMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 404 TRUNK NAME
DESCRIPTION:Allows an eleven (11) character name to be entered to identify an individual trunk.
Names are written using the keypad. Each press of a key will select a character.Press the desired key to move the cursor to the next position. For example, if thedirectory name is “SAM SMITH,” press the number “7” three times to get the letter“S.” Now press the number “2” once to get the letter “A.” Continue selectingcharacters from the table below to complete your message. Pressing the “A” keywill change the letter from upper case to lower case.
NOTE: When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as theprevious character, press the UP key to move the cursor to the right or the DOWNkey to move the cursor left. A space can be entered by using these keys.
• DCS KEYSETS
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5DIAL 0 Q Z . ) 0DIAL 1 space ? , ! 1DIAL 2 A B C @ 2DIAL 3 D E F # 3DIAL 4 G H I $ 4DIAL 5 J K L % 5DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6DIAL 7 P R S & 7DIAL 8 T U V ✱ 8DIAL 9 W X Y ( 9DIAL ✱✱✱✱ : = [ ] ✱
The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %,$, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 404
• FALCON KEYSETS
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5
DIAL 0 < > . ) 0DIAL 1 space ? , ! 1DIAL 2 A B C @ 2DIAL 3 D E F # 3DIAL 4 G H I $ 4DIAL 5 J K L % 5DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6DIAL 7 P Q R S 7DIAL 8 T U V ✱ 8DIAL 9 W X Y Z 9DIAL ✱ : = [ ] ✱
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previouscharacter, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN Used to scroll through options/move cursor left or rightKEYPAD Used to enter selectionsSOFT KEYS Move cursor left and rightSPK Used to store data and advance to next MMCHOLD Used to clear previous entryA Key 19; acts as toggle between upper case and lower case
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press TRSF 404Display shows
[701] TRUNK NAME
2. Dial trunk (e.g., 704)OR
[704] TRUNK NAME
Press UP or DOWN to select trunkPress RIGHT soft key to move the cursor
3. Enter trunk name using the procedure abovePress RIGHT soft key to return to step 2
[704] TRUNK NAMESAMSUNG
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 404
4. Press TRSF to store and exitOR
Press SPK to store and advance to next MMC
DEFAULT DATA: NO NAMES ENTERED
RELATED ITEMS: MMC 104 STATION NAMEMMC 405 TRUNK NUMBER“A” KEY IS BUTTON 19
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 405 TRUNK NUMBER
DESCRIPTION:
Allows an 11 digit number to be entered to identify an individual trunk.
Numbers are written using the keypad. Each press of a key will select a digit.Pressing the desired key will move the cursor to the next position. For example, ifthe directory number is “426-4100,” press the number “4” five times to get thenumber “4.” Now press the number “2” five times for number “2.” Continueselecting characters from the table below to complete your number.
NOTE: When the number you want appears on the same dial pad key as theprevious number, press the UP key to move the cursor to the right or the DOWN keyto move the cursor left.
• DCS KEYSETS
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5DIAL 0 Q Z . ) 0DIAL 1 space ? , ! 1DIAL 2 A B C @ 2DIAL 3 D E F # 3DIAL 4 G H I $ 4DIAL 5 J K L % 5DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6DIAL 7 P R S & 7DIAL 8 T U V ✱ 8DIAL 9 W X Y ( 9DIAL ✱✱✱✱ : = [ ] ✱
The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %,$, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 405
• FALCON KEYSETS
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5
DIAL 0 < > . ) 0DIAL 1 space ? , ! 1DIAL 2 A B C @ 2DIAL 3 D E F # 3DIAL 4 G H I $ 4DIAL 5 J K L % 5DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6DIAL 7 P Q R S 7DIAL 8 T U V ✱ 8DIAL 9 W X Y Z 9DIAL ✱ : = [ ] ✱
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previouscharacter, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN Used to scroll through options/move cursor left or rightKEYPAD Used to enter selectionsSOFT KEYS Move cursor left and rightSPK Used to store data and advance to next MMCHOLD Used to clear previous entryA Key 19; acts as toggle between upper case and lower case
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press TRSF 405Display shows
[701] CO TEL NO.
2. Dial trunk (e.g., 704)OR
[704] CO TEL NO.
Press UP or DOWN to select trunkPress RIGHT soft key to move the cursor
3. Enter trunk number using the proceduredescribed above
[704] CO TEL NO.3054264100
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 405
4. Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2OR
Press TRSF to store and exitOR
Press SPK to store and advance to next MMC
DEFAULT DATA: NO NUMBERS ENTERED
RELATED ITEMS: MMC 404 TRUNK NAME
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 602 STATION GROUP NAME
DESCRIPTION:Allows the system administrator or technician to enter a character name to identifyan individual station group. There are ten characters for Version 1 software and 11characters for Version 2 software.
Names are written using the keypad. Each press of a key will select a character.Pressing the next key will move the cursor to the next position. For example, if thedirectory name is “SAMSUNG," press the number “7” three times to get the letter“S.” Now press the number “2” once to get the letter “A.” Continue selectingcharacters from the table below to complete your message. Pressing the bottom leftprogrammable key will change the letter from upper case to lower case.
NOTE: When the character that you want appears on the same dial pad key as theprevious character, press the UP key to move the cursor to the right or the DOWNkey to move the cursor left.
• DCS KEYSETS
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5DIAL 0 Q Z . ) 0DIAL 1 space ? , ! 1DIAL 2 A B C @ 2DIAL 3 D E F # 3DIAL 4 G H I $ 4DIAL 5 J K L % 5DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6DIAL 7 P R S & 7DIAL 8 T U V ✱ 8DIAL 9 W X Y ( 9DIAL ✱✱✱✱ : = [ ] ✱
The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %,$, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 602
• FALCON KEYSETS
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5
DIAL 0 < > . ) 0DIAL 1 space ? , ! 1DIAL 2 A B C @ 2DIAL 3 D E F # 3DIAL 4 G H I $ 4DIAL 5 J K L % 5DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6DIAL 7 P Q R S 7DIAL 8 T U V ✱ 8DIAL 9 W X Y Z 9DIAL ✱ : = [ ] ✱
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previouscharacter, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN Used to scroll through optionsKEYPAD Used to enter selectionsSOFT KEYS Move cursor left and rightSPK Used to store data and advance to next MMCHOLD Used to clear previous entry
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press TRSF 602Display shows
[501] SGR NAME
2. Dial group number (e.g., 505)OR
[505] SGR NAME
Press UP or DOWN key to make selectionPress LEFT or RIGHT soft key to move cursor
3. Enter name using above method and table [505] SGR NAMESAMSUNG
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 602
4. Press LEFT or RIGHT soft key to return to step 2OR
Press TRSF to store and exitOR
Press SPK to store and advance to next MMC
DEFAULT DATA: NONE
RELATED ITEMS: MMC 104 STATION NAMEMMC 404 TRUNK NAMEMMC 600 ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUPMMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME
DESCRIPTION:Allows an eleven (11) character name to be entered for each system speed diallocation. This name enables the speed dial number to be located when using thedirectory dial feature. The directory dial feature allows the display keyset user toselect a speed dial location by scanning its name.
Names are written using the keypad. Each press of a key selects a character.Pressing a different key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if thedirectory name is “SAM SMITH,” press “7” three times to get the letter “S.” Press“2” once to get the letter “A.” Continue selecting characters from the table below tocomplete your message. Pressing the “A” key will change the letter from uppercase to lower case.
NOTE: When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as theprevious character, press the UP key to move the cursor to the right.
• DCS KEYSETS
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5DIAL 0 Q Z . ) 0DIAL 1 space ? , ! 1DIAL 2 A B C @ 2DIAL 3 D E F # 3DIAL 4 G H I $ 4DIAL 5 J K L % 5DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6DIAL 7 P R S & 7DIAL 8 T U V ✱ 8DIAL 9 W X Y ( 9DIAL ✱✱✱✱ : = [ ] ✱
The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %,$, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 706
• FALCON KEYSETS
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5
DIAL 0 < > . ) 0DIAL 1 space ? , ! 1DIAL 2 A B C @ 2DIAL 3 D E F # 3DIAL 4 G H I $ 4DIAL 5 J K L % 5DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6DIAL 7 P Q R S 7DIAL 8 T U V ✱ 8DIAL 9 W X Y Z 9DIAL ✱ : = [ ] ✱
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previouscharacter, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN Used to scroll through optionsKEYPAD Used to enter selectionsSOFT KEYS Move cursor left and rightSPK Used to store data and advance to next MMCHOLD Used to clear previous entryTRSF Used to store and exit MMC
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press TRSF 706Display shows
SYS SPEED NAME500:
2. Dial system speed entry number (e.g., 505)OR
SYS SPEED NAME505:
Press UP or DOWN to select entry numberand press RIGHT soft key to move cursor
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 706
3. Enter name using dial keypad and abovetable and press RIGHT soft key to return to
SYS SPEED NAME505:SAMSUNG
step 2OR
Press the F key to toggle to speed dialnumber to return to MMC 705, step 5
SYS SPEED DIAL505:
4. Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2OR
Press TRSF to store and exitOR
Press SPK to store and advance to next MMC
DEFAULT DATA: NO NAMES
RELATED ITEMS: MMC 705 ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
DESCRIPTION:Assigns an incoming DID call to a specific day or night station or station group. Italso provides a call waiting option, if needed, so that a second incoming DID callcan be received. An eleven (11) character name can be added to the number. Thereare a maximum of 500 entries in the table.
Names are written using the keypad. Each press of a key selects a character.Pressing the dial pad key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if thedirectory name is “SAM SMITH,” press “7” three times to get the letter “S.” Press “2”once to get “A.” Continue selecting characters from the table below to completeyour message. Pressing the bottom left programmable key changes the letter fromupper case to lower case.
NOTE: When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as theprevious character, press the UP key to move the cursor to the right.
• DCS KEYSETS
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5DIAL 0 Q Z . ) 0DIAL 1 space ? , ! 1DIAL 2 A B C @ 2DIAL 3 D E F # 3DIAL 4 G H I $ 4DIAL 5 J K L % 5DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6DIAL 7 P R S & 7DIAL 8 T U V ✱ 8DIAL 9 W X Y ( 9DIAL ✱✱✱✱ : = [ ] ✱
The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %,$, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 714
• FALCON KEYSETS
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5
DIAL 0 < > . ) 0DIAL 1 space ? , ! 1DIAL 2 A B C @ 2DIAL 3 D E F # 3DIAL 4 G H I $ 4DIAL 5 J K L % 5DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6DIAL 7 P Q R S 7DIAL 8 T U V ✱ 8DIAL 9 W X Y Z 9DIAL ✱ : = [ ] ✱
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previouscharacter, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN Used to scroll through optionsKEYPAD Used to enter selectionsSOFT KEYS Move cursor left and rightSPK Used to store data and advance to next MMCHOLD Used to clear previous entry
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press TRSF 714Display shows
DID DIGIT (001)DGT: CW:NO
2. Enter valid index number, e.g. 005,via dial keypad
DID DIGIT (005)DGT: CW:NO
ORPress UP or DOWN key to make selectionPress RIGHT soft key to move cursor
3. Enter digits to be translated (e.g. 5065)via dial keypad and press RIGHT
DID DIGIT (005)DGT:5065 CW:NO
soft key to move cursor
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 714
4. Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO CALL WAITINGpress RIGHT soft key to move cursor to next
DID DIGIT (005)DGT:5065 CW:YES
display
5. Enter station or group number for DAYdestination via dial keypad
DID DIGIT (005)RG→→→→D:205 N:NONE
ORPress UP or DOWN key to make selectionIf valid entry, system will advance cursor
6. Enter station or group number for NIGHTdestination via dial keypad
DID DIGIT (005)RG→→→→D:205 N:NONE
ORPress UP or DOWN key to make selectionIf valid entry, system will move cursor
7. Enter name using above table and pressRIGHT soft key to return to step 2
DID DIGIT (005)NAME:_
. Press TRSF to store and exitOR
Press SPK to store and advance to next MMC
DEFAULT DATA: NO ENTRIES
RELATED ITEMS: TRUNK PROGRAMMINGMMC 416 ASSIGN E&M TRANSLATION
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 715 PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION:
Allows the programming of a 16 character custom message. Messages are writtenvia the keypad. Each press of a key will select a character. Pressing a different keymoves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the message is “Sunbathing,”press the number “7” three times to get the letter “S.” Now press “8” twice to get theletter “U.” Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete yourmessage. Pressing the “A” key changes the letter from upper case to lower case.
NOTE: When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as theprevious character, press the UP key to move the cursor to the right or the DOWNkey to move the cursor to the left.
• DCS KEYSETS
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5DIAL 0 Q Z . ) 0DIAL 1 space ? , ! 1DIAL 2 A B C @ 2DIAL 3 D E F # 3DIAL 4 G H I $ 4DIAL 5 J K L % 5DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6DIAL 7 P R S & 7DIAL 8 T U V ✱ 8DIAL 9 W X Y ( 9DIAL ✱✱✱✱ : = [ ] ✱
The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %,$, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 715
• FALCON KEYSETS
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5
DIAL 0 < > . ) 0DIAL 1 space ? , ! 1DIAL 2 A B C @ 2DIAL 3 D E F # 3DIAL 4 G H I $ 4DIAL 5 J K L % 5DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6DIAL 7 P Q R S 7DIAL 8 T U V ✱ 8DIAL 9 W X Y Z 9DIAL ✱ : = [ ] ✱
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previouscharacter, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN Used to scroll through optionsKEYPAD Used to enter selectionsSOFT KEYS Move cursor left and rightSPK Used to store data and advance to next MMCHOLD Used to clear previous entry“A” KEY Toggles from upper case to lower case
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press TRSF 715Display shows
PGM .MESSAGE(01)IN A MEETING
2. Enter index number (e.g., 11)OR
PGM.MESSAGE (11)_
Press UP or DOWN arrow to make selectionand press RIGHT soft key to move cursor
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 715
3. Enter message via the dial keypad using theabove table (maximum 16 characters)
PGM.MESSAGE(11)SunBathing
Use “A” key to toggle uppercase/lowercasePress RIGHT soft key to return to step 2
4. Press TRSF to store and exitOR
Press SPK to store and advance to next MMC
DEFAULT DATA: TEN PROGRAMMED MESSAGES AS DETAILED BELOW01. IN A MEETING02. OUT ON A CALL03. OUT TO LUNCH04. LEAVE A MESSAGE05. PAGE ME06. OUT OF TOWN07. IN TOMORROW08. RETURN AFTERNOON09. ON VACATION10. GONE HOMEMESSAGES 11–20 ARE NOT USED
RELATED ITEMS: MMC 115 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
DESCRIPTION:
Allows the customizing of programmable keys on specific electronic keysets, AOM,or 64 button module on the DCS 50si system. For keysets, buttons 1 and 2 are setas CALL buttons by default. For AOMs and 64 button DSS boxes all buttons are setas DS keys by default. Features are entered via dial pad keys by pressing the dialpad number the required number of steps to select the feature. For example, forOHVA, the number 6 is pressed three times. If the BOSS key is required, press 2 forthe first letter B and then use the UP or DOWN key to change the selection fromBARGE to BOSS.
DIAL KEYPAD
COUNT→→→→ 1 2 3DIAL 2 AAPLAY BARGE CALLDIAL 3 DICT DICT FAUTODIAL 4 GPIK HLDPK IGDIAL 5 LCR LCR LCRDIAL 6 MMPA NEW OHVADIAL 7 PAGE REJECT SGDIAL 8 TG UA
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN Used to scroll through optionsKEYPAD Used to enter selectionsSOFT KEYS Move cursor left and rightSPK Used to store data and advance to next MMCHOLD Used to clear previous entry
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press TRSF 722Display shows
[201] KEY (KTS)01:CALL1 →→→→
2. Enter selected station number (e.g., 205)OR
[205] KEY (64B)01:CALL1 →→→→
Press UP or DOWN key to select stationPress RIGHT soft key to move cursor
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 722
3. Enter selected key number (e.g., 18)OR
[201] KEY (KTS)18:NONE →→→→_
Press UP or DOWN key to select key numberPress RIGHT soft key to move cursor
4. Using the dial keypad chart, press dial padkey number to make a selection
[201] KEY (KTS)18:NONE →→→→GPIK_
ORPress UP or DOWN key to make a selectionPress RIGHT soft key to advance cursor tostep 5 to enter extender if required or to returnto step 2
5. If required, enter extender (e.g.,03)OR
[201] KEY (KTS)18:NONE →→→→GPIK03
Press UP or DOWN key to make a selectionPress RIGHT soft key to return to step 2
6. Press TRSF to store and exitOR
Press SPK to store and advance to next MMC
DEFAULT DATA: SEE BELOW
RELATED ITEMS: MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER
• DCS KEYSETS
Default 24 Button Keyset with or without Display
01:CALL1 02:CALL2 03:NONE 04:NONE 05:NONE 06:TG907:NONE 08:NONE 09:NONE 10:NONE 11:NONE 12:NONE13:NONE 14:NONE 15:NONE 16:NONE 17:NONE 18:NONE19:CONF 20:SPD 21:LNR 22:PAGE 23:CBK 24:MSG
Default 12 Button Keyset
01:CALL1 02:CALL2 03:NONE 04:NONE 05:NONE 06:TG907:CONF 08:SPD 09:LNR 10:PAGE 11:CBK 12:MSG
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 722
Default Add-On Module
01:DS 02:DS 03:DS 04:DS05:DS 06:DS 07:DS 08:DS09:DS 10:DS 11:DS 12:DS13:DS 14:DS 15:DS 16:DS17:DS 18:DS 19:DS 20:DS21:DS 22:DS 23:DS 24:DS25:DS 26:DS 27:DS 28:DS29:DS 30:DS 31:DS 32:DS
Default 64 Button DSS Box
01:DS 02:DS 03:DS 04:DS05:DS 06:DS 07:DS 08:DS09:DS 10:DS 11:DS 12:DS13:DS 14:DS 15:DS 16:DS17:DS 18:DS 19:DS 20:DS21:DS 22:DS 23:DS 24:DS25:DS 26:DS 27:DS 28:DS29:DS 30:DS 31:DS 32:DS33:DS 34:DS 35:DS 36:DS37:DS 38:DS 39:DS 40:DS41:DS 42:DS 43:DS 44:DS45:DS 46:DS 47:DS 48:DS49:DS 50:DS 51:DS 52:DS53:DS 54:DS 55:DS 56:DS57:DS 58:DS 59:DS 60:DS61:DS 62:DS 63:DS 64:DS
Default 7 Button Keyset
01:CALL1 02:CALL2 03:NONE04:NONE 05:NONE 06:NONE
07:MSG
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 722
• FALCON KEYSETS
Default 28 Button Keyset
01:CALL1 02:CALL2 03:NONE 04:NONE 05:MESSAGE06:NONE 07:NONE 08:NONE 09:NONE 10:NONE11:NONE 12:NONE 13:NONE 14:NONE 15:NONE16:NONE 17:NONE 18:NONE 19:NONE 20:NONE
21:NONE 25:NONE22:NONE 26:NONE23:MEMORY 27:REDIAL24:TRANSFER 28:SPEAKER
Default 18 Button Keyset
01:CALL1 02:CALL2 03:NONE 04:NONE 05:MESSAGE06:NONE 07:NONE 08:NONE 09:NONE 10:NONE
21:NONE 25:NONE22:NONE 26:NONE23:MEMORY 27:REDIAL24:TRANSFER 28:SPEAKER
Default 8 Button Keyset
01:CALL1 02:CALL2 03:MESSAGE 04:TRANSFER05:NONE 06:NONE 07:NONE 08:SPEAKER
Default 64 Button DSS Box
01:DS 02:DS 03:DS 04:DS05:DS 06:DS 07:DS 08:DS09:DS 10:DS 11:DS 12:DS13:DS 14:DS 15:DS 16:DS17:DS 18:DS 19:DS 20:DS21:DS 22:DS 23:DS 24:DS25:DS 26:DS 27:DS 28:DS29:DS 30:DS 31:DS 32:DS33:DS 34:DS 35:DS 36:DS37:DS 38:DS 39:DS 40:DS41:DS 42:DS 43:DS 44:DS45:DS 46:DS 47:DS 48:DS49:DS 50:DS 51:DS 52:DS53:DS 54:DS 55:DS 56:DS57:DS 58:DS 59:DS 60:DS61:DS 62:DS 63:DS 64:DS
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 722
Programmable Key Assignments
AAPLAY: AUTO ATTND MESSAGE PLAY*AAREC: AUTO ATTND MSG RECORD*
ACCT: ACCOUNTALARM: ALARM RING ANSWERAN/RLS: ANSWER/RELEASEBARGE: BARGE-INBLOCK: OHVA BLOCK
BOSS: BOSS/SECRETARYCALL: CALL BUTTON
CAMP: STATION CAMP-ONCANMG: MESSAGE CANCEL
CBK: CALLBACKCID: CALLER ID*
CONF: CONFERENCECR: CALL RECORD KEYCS: CALL STATUS
CSNR: CALLER ID SAVE NUMBER REDIAL*DICT: DICTATION
DIR: DIRECTORYDLOCK: DOOR LOCK
DND: DO NOT DISTURBDP: DIRECT PICKUPDS: DSS KEYDT: DTS KEY
EXT MIC: EXTERNAL MICROPHONE**FAUTO: FORCED AUTO ANSWERFLASH: FLASHFWRD: CALL FORWARD
GPIK: GROUP PICKUPHDSET: HEADSET MODEHLDPK: HOLD PICKUPHOLD: HOLD
IG: IN/OUT OF GROUPINQIRE: INQUIRE (CID)*
ISPY: CID SPY*LCR: LEAST COST ROUTING
LISTN: GROUP LISTENINGLNR: LAST NUMBER REDIAL
MMPA: MEET ME PAGE ANSWERMMPG: MEET ME PAGE
MSG: MESSAGE
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 722
Programmable Key Assignments
MUTE: MUTENEW: NEW CALL
NIGHT: NIGHT SERVICENND: NAME NUMBER DATE (CID)NXT: NEXT (CID)
OHVA: OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCEOPER: OPERATORPAGE: PAGE
PAGPK: PICKUP PAGE HOLDPMSG: PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE
REJECT: OHVA REJECTRETRY: AUTO REDIAL ON BUSYREVW: REVIEW (CID)*
SETMG: SET MESSAGE W/O RINGSG: STATION GROUP
SNR: SAVED NUMBER REDIALSP: UCD SUPERVISOR
SPD: SPEED DIALSPK: SPEAKER**
STORE: STORE DISPLAYED NUMBER (CID)*TG: TRUNK GROUP
TIMER: TIMERTRSF: TRANSFER**
UA: UNIVERSAL ANSWERVM: VOICE MAIL MEMO*
VMADM: VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION*VMAME: ANSWER MACHINE EMULATION*VMMSG: VOICE MAIL MESSAGE KEY*
VT: VOICE MAIL TRANSFER*
NOTE: Items marked with an asterisk require optional hardware and/or software. Itemsmarked with double asterisks (**) indicate FALCON keyset specific feature keys.
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC is much like MMC 722 Station Key Programming. The main difference isthat this MMC is system-wide rather than on a per-station basis. Features areentered via dial pad keys by pressing the dial pad number the required number ofsteps to select the feature. For example, for OHVA, the number 6 is pressed threetimes. If the BOSS key is required, first press 2 for the first letter B and then use theUP or DOWN key to make the selection from BARGE to BOSS.
NOTE: Please remember that this program is system-wide.
DIAL KEYPAD
COUNT→→→→ 1 2 3DIAL 2 AAPLAY BARGE CALLDIAL 3 DICT DICT FAUTODIAL 4 GPIK HLDPK IGDIAL 5 LCR LCR LCRDIAL 6 MMPA NEW OHVADIAL 7 PAGE REJECT SGDIAL 8 TG UA
TYPE OF SET
DIAL 0 24BTNSDIAL 1 12BTNSDIAL 2 32BTNSDIAL 3 7BTNS
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN Used to scroll through optionsKEYPAD Used to enter selectionsSOFT KEYS Move cursor left and rightSPK Used to store data and advance to next MMCHOLD Used to clear previous entry
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 723
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press TRSF 723Display shows
SYS.KEY PROGRAMTYPE:24 BTN SETS
2. Enter the type of set via dial pad (e.g., 2)OR
SYS.KEY PROGRAMTYPE:24 BTN SETS
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection andpress RIGHT soft key to move cursor
3. Enter key number (e.g., 18)OR
SYS.KEY PROGRAM18:DS →→→→
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection andpress RIGHT soft key move cursor
4. Using the dial keypad chart, press the dialpad key number to make a selection
SYS.KEY PROGRAM18:DS →→→→GPIK
ORPress UP or DOWN key to make a selectionPress RIGHT soft key to advance cursor tostep 5 to enter extender if required
ORPress LEFT soft key to return to step 3
5. If required, enter extender (e.g.,03)OR
SYS.KEY PROGRAM18:DS →→→→GPIK03
Press UP or DOWN key to make a selectionPress RIGHT soft key to return to step 2Press LEFT soft key to return to step 3
6. Press TRSF to store and exitOR
Press SPK to store and advance to next MMC
DEFAULT DATA: SEE BELOW
RELATED ITEMS: NONE
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 723
• DCS KEYSETS
Default 24 Button Keyset with or without Display
01:CALL1 02:CALL2 03:NONE 04:NONE 05:NONE 06:TG907:NONE 08:NONE 09:NONE 10:NONE 11:NONE 12:NONE13:NONE 14:NONE 15:NONE 16:NONE 17:NONE 18:NONE19:CONF 20:SPD 21:LNR 22:PAGE 23:CBK 24:MSG
Default 12 Button Keyset
01:CALL1 02:CALL2 03:NONE 04:NONE 05:NONE 06:TG907:CONF 08:SPD 09:LNR 10:PAGE 11:CBK 12:MSG
Default Add-On Module
01:DS 02:DS 03:DS 04:DS05:DS 06:DS 07:DS 08:DS09:DS 10:DS 11:DS 12:DS13:DS 14:DS 15:DS 16:DS17:DS 18:DS 19:DS 20:DS21:DS 22:DS 23:DS 24:DS25:DS 26:DS 27:DS 28:DS29:DS 30:DS 31:DS 32:DS
Default 64 Button DSS Box
01:DS 02:DS 03:DS 04:DS05:DS 06:DS 07:DS 08:DS09:DS 10:DS 11:DS 12:DS13:DS 14:DS 15:DS 16:DS17:DS 18:DS 19:DS 20:DS21:DS 22:DS 23:DS 24:DS25:DS 26:DS 27:DS 28:DS29:DS 30:DS 31:DS 32:DS33:DS 34:DS 35:DS 36:DS37:DS 38:DS 39:DS 40:DS41:DS 42:DS 43:DS 44:DS45:DS 46:DS 47:DS 48:DS49:DS 50:DS 51:DS 52:DS53:DS 54:DS 55:DS 56:DS57:DS 58:DS 59:DS 60:DS61:DS 62:DS 63:DS 64:DS
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 723
Default 7 Button Keyset
01:CALL1 02:CALL2 03:NONE04:NONE 05:NONE 06:NONE
07:MSG
• FALCON KEYSETS
Default 28 Button Keyset
01:CALL1 02:CALL2 03:NONE 04:NONE 05:MESSAGE06:NONE 07:NONE 08:NONE 09:NONE 10:NONE11:NONE 12:NONE 13:NONE 14:NONE 15:NONE16:NONE 17:NONE 18:NONE 19:NONE 20:NONE
21:NONE 25:NONE22:NONE 26:NONE23:MEMORY 27:REDIAL24:TRANSFER 28:SPEAKER
Default 18 Button Keyset
01:CALL1 02:CALL2 03:NONE 04:NONE 05:MESSAGE06:NONE 07:NONE 08:NONE 09:NONE 10:NONE
21:NONE 25:NONE22:NONE 26:NONE23:MEMORY 27:REDIAL24:TRANSFER 28:SPEAKER
Default 8 Button Keyset
01:CALL1 02:CALL2 03:MESSAGE 04:TRANSFER05:NONE 06:NONE 07:NONE 08:SPEAKER
Default 64 Button DSS Box
01:DS 02:DS 03:DS 04:DS05:DS 06:DS 07:DS 08:DS09:DS 10:DS 11:DS 12:DS13:DS 14:DS 15:DS 16:DS17:DS 18:DS 19:DS 20:DS21:DS 22:DS 23:DS 24:DS25:DS 26:DS 27:DS 28:DS29:DS 30:DS 31:DS 32:DS33:DS 34:DS 35:DS 36:DS
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 723
37:DS 38:DS 39:DS 40:DS41:DS 42:DS 43:DS 44:DS45:DS 46:DS 47:DS 48:DS49:DS 50:DS 51:DS 52:DS53:DS 54:DS 55:DS 56:DS57:DS 58:DS 59:DS 60:DS61:DS 62:DS 63:DS 64:DS
Programmable Key Assignments
AAPLAY: AUTO ATTENDANT PLAY*AAREC: AUTO ATTENDANT RECORD*
ACCT: ACCOUNTALARM: ALARM RING ANSWERAN/RLS: ANSWER/RELEASEBARGE: BARGE-INBLOCK: OHVA BLOCK
BOSS: BOSS/SECRETARYCALL: CALL BUTTON
CAMP: STATION CAMP-ONCANMG: MESSAGE CANCEL
CBK: CALLBACKCID: CALLER ID*
CONF: CONFERENCECR: CALL RECORD KEYCS: CALL STATUS
CSNR: CALLER ID SAVE NUMBER REDIAL*DICT: DICTATION
DIR: DIRECTORYDLOCK: DOOR LOCK
DND: DO NOT DISTURBDP: DIRECT PICKUPDS: DSS KEYDT: DTS KEY
EXT MIC: EXTERNAL MICROPHONE**FAUTO: FORCED AUTO ANSWERFLASH: FLASHFWRD: CALL FORWARD
GPIK: GROUP PICKUPHDSET: HEADSET MODEHLDPK: HOLD PICKUPHOLD: HOLD
IG: IN/OUT OF GROUP
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 723
Programmable Key Assignments
INQUIRE: INQUIRE (CID)*ISPY: CID SPY*LCR: LEAST COST ROUTING
LISTN: GROUP LISTENINGLNR: LAST NUMBER REDIAL
MMPA: MEET ME PAGE ANSWERMMPG: MEET ME PAGE
MSG: MESSAGEMUTE: MUTENEW: NEW CALL
NIGHT: NIGHT SERVICENND: NAME NUMBER DATE (CID)*NXT: NEXT (CID)*
OHVA: OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCEOPER: OPERATORPAGE: PAGE
PAGPK: PICKUP PAGE HOLDPMSG: PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE
REJECT: OHVA REJECTRETRY: AUTO REDIAL ON BUSYREVW: REVIEW (CID)*
SG: STATION GROUPSETMG: SET MESSAGE W/O RING
SNR: SAVED NUMBER REDIALSP: UCD SUPERVISOR
SPD: SPEED DIALSPK: SPEAKER**
STORE: STORE DISPLAYED NUMBER (CID)*TG: TRUNK GROUP
TIMER: TIMERUA: UNIVERSAL ANSWER
TRSF: TRANSFER**VM: VOICE MAIL MEMO*
VMADM: VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION*VMAME: ANSWER MACHINE EMULATION*VMMSG: VOICE MAIL MESSAGE KEY*
VT: VOICE MAIL TRANSFER*
NOTE: Items marked with an asterisk require optional hardware and/or software. Itemsmarked with double asterisks (**) indicate FALCON keysets specific feature keys.
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 725 SMDR OPTIONS
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE: This MMC requires optional hardware and/or software.
Allows the system administrator to select the information to be printed on the SMDRreport. The following options may be selected to print on SMDR.
00. PAGE HEADER This option determines whether a page header will printat the top of each page. This would normally be turnedoff if SMDR is being sent to a call accounting machine.
01. LINE PER PAGE This option selects the length of each page to determinewhen to print the SMDR header. The number of linesmay be in the range 01 to 99.
02. INCOMING CALL This option determines whether incoming calls will printon SMDR.
03. OUTGOING CALL This option determines whether outgoing calls will printon SMDR.
04. AUTHORIZE CODE This option determines whether authorization codes willprint on SMDR.
05. LESS START TIME This option determines whether valid calls will includethe minimum call time in total call duration.
06. IN/OUT GROUP This option allows a message, IN GROUP or OUTGROUP, to be printed in the digits dialed column eachtime a station enters or leaves a group.
07. DND CALL This option allows a message, IN DND or OUT DND, tobe printed in the digits dialed column each time a stationenters or leaves DND.
08. WAKE-UP CALL This option determines whether stations receiving analarm reminder call will print on SMDR.
09. DIRECTORY NAME This option allows the system administrator to enter a 16character name which will appear on the SMDR header.
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 725
10. CALLER ID This option can be selected to print Caller ID datareceived from the Central Office on incoming calls. Thisoption requires the use of a 132 column (wide carriage)printer or an 80 column printer set for condensed print.
11. ABANDON CALL If this option is set to YES, unanswered calls for whichCID information was received will print on SMDR.
The DIRECTORY NAME that appears on the SMDR header is programmed asfollows. Names are written using the keypad. Each press of a key selects acharacter. Pressing the next key moves the cursor to the next position. For example,if the directory name is “SAM SMITH,” press the number “7” three times to get theletter “S.” Now press the number “2” once to get the letter “A.” Continue selectingcharacters from the table below to complete your message.
NOTE: When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as theprevious character, press the VOL UP key to move the cursor to the right.
• DCS KEYSETS
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5DIAL 0 Q Z . ) 0DIAL 1 space ? , ! 1DIAL 2 A B C @ 2DIAL 3 D E F # 3DIAL 4 G H I $ 4DIAL 5 J K L % 5DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6DIAL 7 P R S & 7DIAL 8 T U V ✱ 8DIAL 9 W X Y ( 9DIAL ✱✱✱✱ : = [ ] ✱
The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %,$, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 725
• FALCON KEYSETS
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5
DIAL 0 < > . ) 0DIAL 1 space ? , ! 1DIAL 2 A B C @ 2DIAL 3 D E F # 3DIAL 4 G H I $ 4DIAL 5 J K L % 5DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6DIAL 7 P Q R S 7DIAL 8 T U V ✱ 8DIAL 9 W X Y Z 9DIAL ✱ : = [ ] ✱
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previouscharacter, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN Used to scroll through optionsKEYPAD Used to enter selectionsSOFT KEYS Move cursor left and rightSPK Used to store data and advance to next MMC
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press TRSF 725Display shows
PAGE HEADERPRINT : YES
2. Dial the option number (e.g., 01)OR
LINE PER PAGE66 LINE / PAGE
Use the UP and DOWN keys to scrollthrough the options and press the right orleft soft key to select option
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 725
3. Enter the number of lines per page in therange 01–99 (e.g., 50)
50 LINE / PAGELINE PER PAGE
OR ORUse UP and DOWN to change number oflines and press the right or left soft key
LINE PER PAGE50 LINE / PAGE
to save the data and return to step 2 THENLINE PER PAGE50 LINE / PAGE
4. If option 00 is selected at step 2 PAGE HEADERPRINT : YES
5. If option 02 is selected at step 2 INCOMING CALLPRINT : YES
6. If option 03 is selected at step 2 OUTGOING CALLPRINT : YES
7. If option 04 is selected at step 2 AUTHORIZE CODEPRINT : NO
8. If option 05 is selected at step 2 LESS START TIMEPRINT : YES
9. If option 06 is selected at step 2 IN/OUT GROUPPRINT : YES
10. If option 07 is selected at step 2 DND CALLPRINT : YES
11. If option 08 is selected at step 2 WAKE-UP CALLPRINT : YES
12. If option 09 is selected at step 2 DIRECTORY NAME_
12a. Enter the 16 character name as describedabove
DIRECTORY NAMESAMSUNG DCS
12b. Press right or left soft key to save name andreturn to step 2
DIRECTORY NAMESAMSUNG DCS
13. If option 10 is selected at step 2 CALLER ID DATAPRINT : YES
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 725
14. If option 11 is selected at step 2
15. After all desired options have been selected,press TRSF to exit
ORPress SPK to exit and advance to next MMC
DEFAULT DATA: PAGE HEADER YESLINE PER PAGE 66INCOMING CALL NOOUTGOING CALL YESAUTHORIZE CODE NOLESS START TIME YESIN/OUT GROUP NODND CALL NOWAKE-UP CALL YESDIRECTORY NAME NO DEFAULT DEFINEDCALLER ID DATA NOABANDON CALL NO
RELATED ITEMS: MMC 300 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATIONSMDR FORMAT FOR CALLER ID (SEE BELOW)
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 725
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 728 CALLER ID TRANSLATION TABLE
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE: This MMC requires optional hardware and/or software.
Allows the system administrator or technician to associate a CID number receivedfrom the central office with a name programmed in this translation table. If there isno match between a received number and a name in this table, “no CID name” willbe displayed.
The translation table consists of 350 entries with each entry comprised of a ten digittelephone number and a 16 digit name.
Names are written using the keypad. Each press of a key will select a character.Pressing the next key will move the cursor to the next position. For example, if thedirectory name is “SAM SMITH,” press the number “7” three times to get the letter“S.” Now press the number “2” once to get the letter “A.” Continue selectingcharacters from the table below to complete your message.
NOTE: When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as theprevious character, press the VOL UP key to move the cursor to the right.
• DCS KEYSETS
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5DIAL 0 Q Z . ) 0DIAL 1 space ? , ! 1DIAL 2 A B C @ 2DIAL 3 D E F # 3DIAL 4 G H I $ 4DIAL 5 J K L % 5DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6DIAL 7 P R S & 7DIAL 8 T U V ✱ 8DIAL 9 W X Y ( 9DIAL ✱✱✱✱ : = [ ] ✱
The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %,$, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 728
• FALCON KEYSETS
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5
DIAL 0 < > . ) 0DIAL 1 space ? , ! 1DIAL 2 A B C @ 2DIAL 3 D E F # 3DIAL 4 G H I $ 4DIAL 5 J K L % 5DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6DIAL 7 P Q R S 7DIAL 8 T U V ✱ 8DIAL 9 W X Y Z 9DIAL ✱ : = [ ] ✱
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previouscharacter, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN Used to scroll through optionsKEYPAD Used to enter selectionsSOFT KEYS Move cursor left and rightSPK Used to store data and advance to next MMCHOLD Used to clear previous entry
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press TRSF 728Display shows first entry
CID XLATION(001)DIGIT:
2. Dial entry number (e.g., 005)OR
CID XLATION(005)DIGIT:
Use UP and DOWN to scroll through entriesPress RIGHT soft key to select entry
DCS 50si PROGRAMMINGTECHNICAL MANUAL PART 2 JUNE 2001
MMC: 728
3. Enter telephone number and press RIGHTsoft key to advance to name entry
CID XLATION(005)DIGIT:3054264100
OREnter telephone number and pressLEFT soft key to return to step 2
4. Enter associated name as describedabove and press RIGHT or LEFT soft key
CID XLATION : 005SAMSUNG TELECOM
to return to step 2OR
Press SPK to save and advance to nextMMC
ORPress TRSF to save and exit programming
DEFAULT DATA: NONE
RELATED ITEMS: NONE
COPY AS NEEDED 12/98 SHEET ______ OF ______
MMC 106 STATION SPEED DIAL NAME
STATION# NAME
BIN 00
COPY AS NEEDED 06/01 SHEET ______ OF ______
MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER
LCD 24B OR STD 24B KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06:
07: 08: 09: 10: 11: 12:
13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18:
19: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24:
LCD 24B OR STD 24B KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06:
07: 08: 09: 10: 11: 12:
13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18:
19: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24:
LCD 24B OR STD 24B KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06:
07: 08: 09: 10: 11: 12:
13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18:
19: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24:
COPY AS NEEDED 06/01 SHEET ______ OF ______
LCD 12B OR BASIC 12B KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06:
07: 08: 09: 10: 11: 12:
LCD 12B OR BASIC 12B KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06:
07: 08: 09: 10: 11: 12:
LCD 12B OR BASIC 12B KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06:
07: 08: 09: 10: 11: 12:
LCD 12B OR BASIC 12B KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06:
07: 08: 09: 10: 11: 12:
LCD 12B OR BASIC 12B KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06:
07: 08: 09: 10: 11: 12:
COPY AS NEEDED 06/01 SHEET ______ OF ______
7B KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06:
07:
7B KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06:
07:
7B KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06:
07:
7B KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06:
07:
7B KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06:
07:
COPY AS NEEDED 06/01 SHEET ______ OF ______
32 BUTTON ADD-ON MODULE
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04:
05: 06: 07: 08:
09: 10: 11: 12:
13: 14: 15: 16:
17: 18: 19: 20:
21: 22: 23: 21:
25: 26: 27: 28:
29: 30: 31: 32:
32 BUTTON ADD-ON MODULE
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04:
05: 06: 07: 08:
09: 10: 11: 12:
13: 14: 15: 16:
17: 18: 19: 20:
21: 22: 23: 21:
25: 26: 27: 28:
29: 30: 31: 32:
COPY AS NEEDED 06/01 SHEET ______ OF ______
DCS AND FALCON 64 BUTTON ADD-ON MODULE
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04:
05: 06: 07: 08:
09: 10: 11: 12:
13: 14: 15: 16:
17: 18: 19: 20:
21: 22: 23: 21:
25: 26: 27: 28:
29: 30: 31: 32:
33: 34: 35: 36:
37: 38: 39: 40:
41: 42: 43: 44:
45: 46: 47: 48:
49: 50: 51: 52:
53: 54: 55: 56:
57: 58: 59: 60:
61: 62: 63: 64:
COPY AS NEEDED 06/01 SHEET ______ OF ______
DCS AND FALCON 64 BUTTON ADD-ON MODULE
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04:
05: 06: 07: 08:
09: 10: 11: 12:
13: 14: 15: 16:
17: 18: 19: 20:
21: 22: 23: 21:
25: 26: 27: 28:
29: 30: 31: 32:
33: 34: 35: 36:
37: 38: 39: 40:
41: 42: 43: 44:
45: 46: 47: 48:
49: 50: 51: 52:
53: 54: 55: 56:
57: 58: 59: 60:
61: 62: 63: 64:
COPY AS NEEDED 06/01 SHEET ______ OF ______
FALCON 28 BUTTON KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05:
06: 07: 08: 09: 10:
11: 12: 13: 14: 15:
16: 17: 18: 19: 20:
21: 25:
22: 26:
23: 27:
24: 28:
FALCON 28 BUTTON KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05:
06: 07: 08: 09: 10:
11: 12: 13: 14: 15:
16: 17: 18: 19: 20:
21: 25:
22: 26:
23: 27:
24: 28:
COPY AS NEEDED 06/01 SHEET ______ OF ______
FALCON 18 BUTTON KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05:
06: 07: 08: 09: 10:
21: 25:
22: 26:
23: 27:
24: 28:
FALCON 18 BUTTON KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05:
06: 07: 08: 09: 10:
21: 25:
22: 26:
23: 27:
24: 28:
COPY AS NEEDED 06/01 SHEET ______ OF ______
FALCON 8 BUTTON KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04:
05: 06: 07: 08:
FALCON 8 BUTTON KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04:
05: 06: 07: 08:
FALCON 8 BUTTON KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04:
05: 06: 07: 08:
FALCON 8 BUTTON KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04:
05: 06: 07: 08:
FALCON 8 BUTTON KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04:
05: 06: 07: 08:
COPY AS NEEDED 12/98 SHEET ______ OF ______
MMC 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY
STATION NUMBER NUMBER NAME NO CALLER ID
Default is number only.
COPY AS NEEDED 12/98 SHEET ______ OF ______
MMC 201 CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE
PASSCODE
MMC 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODES
DAY/NIGHT
DISA ALARM
ALARM CLEAR
AA RECORD
MMC 203 ASSIGN UA DEVICE
UA DEVICE DEVICE LOCATION
RING PAGE
STATION
COM BELL
STATION GROUP
MMC 204 COMMON BELL CONTROL
COMMON BELL DEVICE NUMBER
INTERRUPTED
CONTINUOUS
COPY AS NEEDED 12/98 SHEET ______ OF ______
MMC 206 BARGE-IN TYPE
EXT BARGE EXT BARGE EXT BARGE
Barge in options are: NO BARGE IN = 0WITH TONE = 1WITHOUT TONE = 2
MMC 207 ASSIGN VM/AA PORT
EXT VM/AA EXT VM/AA EXT VM/AA
COPY AS NEEDED 06/01 SHEET ______ OF ______
MMC 722 and 723 KEY PROGRAMMING
LCD 24B OR STD 24B KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06:
07: 08: 09: 10: 11: 12:
13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18:
19: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24:
LCD 24B OR STD 24B KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06:
07: 08: 09: 10: 11: 12:
13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18:
19: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24:
LCD 24B OR STD 24B KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06:
07: 08: 09: 10: 11: 12:
13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18:
19: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24:
COPY AS NEEDED 06/01 SHEET ______ OF ______
LCD 12B OR BASIC 12B KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06:
07: 08: 09: 10: 11: 12:
LCD 12B OR BASIC 12B KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06:
07: 08: 09: 10: 11: 12:
LCD 12B OR BASIC 12B KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06:
07: 08: 09: 10: 11: 12:
LCD 12B OR BASIC 12B KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06:
07: 08: 09: 10: 11: 12:
LCD 12B OR BASIC 12B KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06:
07: 08: 09: 10: 11: 12:
COPY AS NEEDED 06/01 SHEET ______ OF ______
7B KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06:
07:
7B KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06:
07:
7B KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06:
07:
7B KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06:
07:
7B KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06:
07:
COPY AS NEEDED 06/01 SHEET ______ OF ______
32 BUTTON ADD-ON MODULE
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04:
05: 06: 07: 08:
09: 10: 11: 12:
13: 14: 15: 16:
17: 18: 19: 20:
21: 22: 23: 21:
25: 26: 27: 28:
29: 30: 31: 32:
32 BUTTON ADD-ON MODULE
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04:
05: 06: 07: 08:
09: 10: 11: 12:
13: 14: 15: 16:
17: 18: 19: 20:
21: 22: 23: 21:
25: 26: 27: 28:
29: 30: 31: 32:
COPY AS NEEDED 06/01 SHEET ______ OF ______
DCS AND FALCON 64 BUTTON ADD-ON MODULE
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04:
05: 06: 07: 08:
09: 10: 11: 12:
13: 14: 15: 16:
17: 18: 19: 20:
21: 22: 23: 21:
25: 26: 27: 28:
29: 30: 31: 32:
29: 30: 31: 32:
33: 34: 35: 36:
37: 38: 39: 40:
41: 42: 43: 44:
45: 46: 47: 48:
49: 50: 51: 52:
53: 54: 55: 56:
57: 58: 59: 60:
61: 62: 63: 64:
COPY AS NEEDED 06/01 SHEET ______ OF ______
DCS AND FALCON 64 BUTTON ADD-ON MODULE
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04:
05: 06: 07: 08:
09: 10: 11: 12:
13: 14: 15: 16:
17: 18: 19: 20:
21: 22: 23: 21:
25: 26: 27: 28:
29: 30: 31: 32:
29: 30: 31: 32:
33: 34: 35: 36:
37: 38: 39: 40:
41: 42: 43: 44:
45: 46: 47: 48:
49: 50: 51: 52:
53: 54: 55: 56:
57: 58: 59: 60:
61: 62: 63: 64:
COPY AS NEEDED 06/01 SHEET ______ OF ______
FALCON 28 BUTTON KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05:
06: 07: 08: 09: 10:
11: 12: 13: 14: 15:
16: 17: 18: 19: 20:
21: 25:
22: 26:
23: 27:
24: 28:
FALCON 28 BUTTON KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05:
06: 07: 08: 09: 10:
11: 12: 13: 14: 15:
16: 17: 18: 19: 20:
21: 25:
22: 26:
23: 27:
24: 28:
COPY AS NEEDED 06/01 SHEET ______ OF ______
FALCON 18 BUTTON KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05:
06: 07: 08: 09: 10:
21: 25:
22: 26:
23: 27:
24: 28:
FALCON 18 BUTTON KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04: 05:
06: 07: 08: 09: 10:
21: 25:
22: 26:
23: 27:
24: 28:
COPY AS NEEDED 06/01 SHEET ______ OF ______
FALCON 8 BUTTON KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04:
05: 06: 07: 08:
FALCON 8 BUTTON KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04:
05: 06: 07: 08:
FALCON 8 BUTTON KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04:
05: 06: 07: 08:
FALCON 8 BUTTON KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04:
05: 06: 07: 08:
FALCON 8 BUTTON KEYSET
EXT NO.
01: 02: 03: 04:
05: 06: 07: 08: